Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Metric Tutorial
25703-050000-5080A 2007
Copyright© 2007 Autodesk, Inc.
All Rights Reserved
This publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose.
AUTODESK, INC., MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE
MATERIALS, AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS.
IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC., BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF ACQUISITION OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS.
THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT
EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE, IF ANY, OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN.
Autodesk, Inc., reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state of the product at the time
of publication, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future.
Autodesk Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December,
3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI,
AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk
Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap,
AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil
3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer,
Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer,
DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert,
DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up
Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical
Desktop, MotionBuilder, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream,
ProjectPoint, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Render Queue, Revit, Showcase, SketchBook, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, Visual, Visual
Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual
Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, and Wiretap.
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,
Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, Wire.
GOVERNMENT USE
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer
Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Contents
Contents | v
Adding Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Placing Lighting Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Placing Power Receptacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Placing Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Creating Power Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Creating Switch Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Defining Circuit Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
vi | Contents
Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Contents | vii
Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
viii | Contents
Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 730
Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732
Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746
Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750
Contents | ix
Determining Component Needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880
Selecting the Family Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 881
Creating the Component Skeleton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884
Adding Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884
Adding Dimensions and Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890
Creating New Length Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 894
Flexing the Component Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 897
Adding Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900
Creating Solid Extrusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900
Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 902
Creating Additional Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905
Testing the Family in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 914
Loading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 914
Testing a Family Instance in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915
Working with Nested Subcomponents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919
Adding a Nested Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919
Creating Formula-controlled Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923
Arraying Nested Subcomponents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 928
Reloading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 933
Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 935
Creating and Applying Subcategories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 935
Creating Material Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940
Controlling Component Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 942
Assigning Detail Level and View Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 942
Creating Component Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 945
Creating Multiple Component Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 945
Creating Conditional Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 946
x | Contents
Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003
Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003
Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1004
Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1008
Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1011
Modifying Render Scene Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1013
Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1015
Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1016
Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1018
Contents | xi
xii | Contents
Getting Started
1
1
2 | Chapter 1 Getting Started
Introduction
1
This introduction helps you get started with the Revit MEP 2008 tutorials and
3
Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to get started with the Revit MEP tutorials, including where to locate the training files
specified in the tutorials and how to create a new Revit MEP project from a template file.
The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title to display the
titles of the lessons in the tutorial, and expand a lesson title to display a list of exercises in the lesson.
NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. The
tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP.
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME
2008\Training. Training files are grouped into three folders within the training folder:
■ Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units.
Common file names have a c_ prefix.
■ Imperial: files specifically for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix.
■ Metric: files specifically for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.
NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for
more information.
IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files
location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included
in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.
What is a dataset?
A dataset is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that is used to
complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Dataset section that references the training file to be used
with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing dataset.
Open a dataset
1 Click File menu ➤ Open.
2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon.
3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of dataset.
4 | Chapter 1 Introduction
4 Click the dataset name, and click Open.
Save a dataset
5 To save a dataset with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As.
In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the
next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and
use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson.
■ For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file.
You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you
save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required.
■ For Save as type, verify that Project Files is selected, and then click Save.
7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing dataset, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.
The Revit MEP platform for building information modeling is a design and documentation system that supports the
design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modeling (BIM) delivers information
about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it.
In the Revit MEP model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information from the
same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit MEP collects information
about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The Revit
MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets,
schedules, sections, and plans.
The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and
change management that Revit MEP provides. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or
by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of
relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is parametric. This concept is important because
it is this capability that delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything
at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project.
The following are examples of these element relationships:
■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. If you move
the partition, the door retains this relationship to the partition.
■ Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the
relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional
characteristic.
■ The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the floor or
roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.
A fundamental characteristic of a building information modeling application is the ability to coordinate changes and
maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change
something, Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected
elements.
Revit MEP uses two key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of relationships
while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. The result of these concepts is
software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.
Revit MEP uses five software element classes: host, component, annotation, view, and datum.
6 | Chapter 1 Introduction
■ Annotations are 2D, view-specific elements that help you produce documentation.
■ Views are dynamic representations of the model and are always up-to-date.
■ Datums are reference elements that help you put your building together.
This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by
you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP.
In Revit MEP, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. The context is determined
by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often,
you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases,
you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning two walls, for example.
Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common, industry-standard terms familiar to most architects.
However, there are some terms that are unique to Revit MEP, and understanding them is crucial to understanding the
software. This section defines the basic terms used in Revit MEP.
Project: In Revit MEP, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information
model. The project file contains all the information for your building design, from geometry to construction data. This
information includes components used to design the model, views of the project, and drawings of the design. By using
a single project file, Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter your design and have changes reflected in all associated
areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it
easier to manage the project.
Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs, floors, and
ceilings. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. You create a level for each
known story or other needed reference of the building; for example, first floor, top of wall, or bottom of foundation.
To place levels, you must be in a section or elevation view.
Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan tiled next to it.
Element: When creating your project, you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. All elements
are considered categories. Revit MEP classifies elements by model component elements and annotation elements.
■ A model component element, such as a door, desk, or roof, represents the actual 3D geometry of the building.
■ An annotation building element, such as a door tag, elevation symbol, or room tag, helps document the model.
Family: Families are classes of elements in a category that group elements with a common set of parameters (properties),
identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some
■ Component family files can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can determine the
set of properties and the graphical representation of the family.
■ System families include walls, dimensions, ceilings, roofs, floors, and levels, and are not available for loading or
creating as separate files.
■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families.
■ You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For
example, the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system; however, you can create different types of walls
with different compositions.
■ System families can be transferred between projects.
Type: Each family can have different types. A type can be a specific size of a family, such as a A0 title block or a 910
x 2110 door. A type can also be a style, such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. A family can
have several types. For example, a table could come in several different sizes. Each different size would be a new type
within the same family.
Instance: Instances are the actual items that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building
(model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances).
8 | Chapter 1 Introduction
In the following illustration, the user interface is labeled. In the steps that follow, you navigate and become familiar
with the user interface.
2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface and notice the Title Bar contains the name of the project
and the view that is currently open.
By default, new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. In addition, the Level
1 floor plan view is the default open view.
TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based.
TIP For example, the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR.
While working in the drawing area, you simply type the required keystrokes to run the command. Another
timesaving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. A context
menu appears with a list of all available commands. The context menu changes depending on the function
you are performing and what is currently selected.
The Toolbar
10 | Chapter 1 Introduction
The Type Selector
7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. Select the drop-down list
to view the list of doors.
The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. If you select the Door tool, the Type Selector displays
a list of doors available within the project. The list of components in the Type Selector is identical to the
components listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category.
The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface, immediately below the Type Selector. There are
10 tabs in the Design Bar, containing buttons grouped by function. You can control which tabs display by
selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog.
11 Click OK.
Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu.
■ Basics tab: Includes commands for creating most basic building model components.
■ View tab: Commands for creating different views in the project.
■ Modelling tab: All the commands to create model elements.
■ Drafting tab: Commands for both adding annotation symbols and creating the sheet details for the
project construction documents.
■ Rendering tab: Commands for creating rendered 3D images.
12 | Chapter 1 Introduction
■ Site tab: Commands for adding site components and producing site plans.
■ Massing tab: Commands for executing conceptual massing commands.
■ Room and Area tab: Commands for making room and area schemes and plans.
■ Structural tab: Commands for adding structural components to your project.
■ Construction tab: Includes commands for creating construction industry information.
To access the commands within a tab, click the tab, and the respective commands are displayed on the
Design Bar.
TIP You can turn the visibility of each tab on and off by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab
from the context menu.
12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. In the Project Browser, select Views (all).
You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views, schedules, sheets, reports, families, and
groups of your current project:
■ Right-click in the browser to add, delete, and rename views, families, and groups.
■ The browser is conveniently organized by view type (floor plans, elevations, 3D), family category
(doors, walls, windows), and group name. Expand or compress the browser list by clicking the + or -
sign next to the name.
13 In the Type Selector, scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser.
17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. Do not click.
14 | Chapter 1 Introduction
In the bottom left corner of the window, notice the Status Bar provides information regarding what you
should do next. In this case, it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point."
TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar.
TIP When attempting to select a specific component in a crowded or detailed view, use the Tab key to alternate
between nearby components.
19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area.
The elevation symbol consists of two parts, the main symbol and the elevation directional arrows. Make
sure you place the cursor over the arrow portion of the symbol. It highlights when the cursor is over it.
In the Status Bar, notice that the name of the preselected component is Views: Elevation: West.
20 Press TAB, and notice that the preselected component switches to the main elevation symbol, Elevations:
Elevation: Elevation 5.
When attempting to select a specific component in a complex or crowded view, you can use the Status Bar
and the Tab key to toggle between components and select the desired component.
■ Dialog Boxes: Dialog boxes include Help buttons. Click the Help button, and the topic specific to the
dialog box opens. If there is no Help button displayed, press F1 to get help on that dialog box.
■ Windows: From any window, press F1 to get the topic associated with the window.
■ Toolbar: From the Toolbar, click , and then click on a specific menu command or command
button for Help. You can also press SHIFT+F1. Be sure to have the Standard toolbar displayed.
■ Tool Tips: To see Tool Tips, rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the Tool Tip displays.
TIP You can control the level of Tool Tip assistance from the Settings ➤ Options menu.
In the following steps, you open a dataset and practice adjusting the view with the zoom commands.
16 | Chapter 1 Introduction
The 3D isometric view displays:
NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself automatically activates the Zoom In Region command.
7 Click Zoom To Fit, and the view of the buiding model is sized to fit the available window.
8 Click in the drawing area, and enter the shortcut keys ZR to zoom in on a region.
The cursor becomes a magnifying glass.
9 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region you wish to zoom; this is referred to as a
crossing selection.
NOTE As you zoom in and out within a view, Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less
than 2mm in the drawing area. To modify or add snap increments, click Settings menu ➤ Snaps.
11 Zoom is also available in Dynamic View mode. To display the Dynamic View dialog in a 2D or 3D view,
■ In the Dynamic View dialog, click Zoom, and drag the cursor in the drawing area.
■ Without clicking in the dialog, press and hold CTRL, hold the middle mouse button (or left mouse
button on a wheel mouse), and drag the cursor.
■ On a wheel mouse, roll the wheel to zoom the view.
13 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click 2nd Flr. Cnst.
When drawing or modifying a building model, it is important to understand how to adjust the size of
components in the drawing area. Small blue dots, called drag controls, display at the ends of selected lines
and walls in a plan view. Similar controls, referred to as shape handles, display along the ends, bottoms,
and tops of selected walls in elevation and 3D views.
14 Enter ZR, zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan, and select the wall, as shown:
Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. These are the drag controls.
18 | Chapter 1 Introduction
15 Click and drag the left control, moving the cursor to the left horizontally, to lengthen the wall.
16 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall.
Move an element
17 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan.
18 Select the Craftsman02 table, and on the Edit toolbar, click (Move).
Some commands, such as Move and Copy, require two clicks to complete the command. After selecting
the element to be moved, for example, click to specify the starting position, and click again to specify the
ending position. In this case, you want to move the table closer to the wall.
21 Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. Select the plant, and drag it
on top of the table.
Undo commands
23 On the Undo menu, select the second item in the list, Move.
Selecting the second action in the list will undo the last two actions. All commands are canceled up to and
including the selected command. The table and plant are returned to their original locations.
20 | Chapter 1 Introduction
NOTE To quickly undo the previous action, on the Standard toolbar, click the Undo command, or press and
hold CTRL and enter Z.
End a command
25 Click in the drawing area to start the line and click again to end it.
Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to place lines.
consist of a VAV duct system and a hydronic piping system. As you create the
mechanical system, you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the
recommended systems design workflow for Revit MEP 2008. This workflow begins
with systems planning and design, and concludes with documenting your design
and exporting your design. By following the recommended workflow, you learn
system design best practices while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems
The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Revit
MEP 2008. At the end of this tutorial, you will understand the process,
NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially; each
exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. After finishing each
exercise, you can choose to save your work. However, it is highly recommended that
you always begin an exercise by opening the provided dataset. This dataset includes
the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. The
datasets that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training FilesMetric
directory. You can search this directory to verify that the datasets have been
downloaded. If the tutorial datasets are not present, go to
http://www.autodesk.com/revitmep-documentation and download them.
23
Planning Mechanical Systems
Creating a mechanical system in Revit MEP is similar to any design project; planning is critical to a successful design.
In this lesson, you plan the system by first creating zones and then performing an energy analysis on the building space
to determine heating and cooling requirements.
Creating Zones
In this exercise, you create zones for the rooms on the first and second floors. Zones allow you to better analyze and
control the heating and cooling of the space. First, however, you create separate views in which to work with zones.
After you create these views, you create a shared project parameter, and then you use this parameter to assign each
zone to a room. Later in the design process, you refer back to the views to verify zone information.
Dataset
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, right-click the
view named 2 - Mech, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.
A new view called Copy of 2 - Mech is created and becomes the active view (it is in boldface).
9 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, under Groups, click New, and name the new parameter group Rooms,
and click OK.
Notice that the new Rooms group is selected for the parameter group.
10 Under Parameters, click New, and enter Zone for Name in the Parameter Properties dialog, and click OK
3 times.
11 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Categories, select Rooms, and click OK twice.
Next, you copy the room tags from the level 2 architectural floor plan to the level 2 mechanical HVAC
floor plan. This allows you to easily identify the rooms when assigning zones.
12 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Architectural ➤ New Construction ➤ Floor Plans, and
double-click Level 2.
13 Place the cursor outside of the building at the upper left corner, drag the cursor to the lower right corner
to draw a pick box around the entire level 2 floor plan.
TIP Notice that by selecting Paste Aligned, all room tags are automatically aligned based on their original
placement. If you had selected Paste from Clipboard (CTRL+V), you would have needed to manually align the
selection.
Creating Zones | 25
Assign zones to the level 2 rooms
19 In the 2 - Mech Zones view, select the Office 6 room component, and click (Properties).
TIP You can easily identify the room component by the diagonal lines that display after placing the cursor in
the room. Note that the Office 6 room tag is not the room component but a room tag (annotation).
20 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, enter zone 1 for Zone, and click OK.
You have assigned zone 1 to Office 6.
21 Assign zones to the remaining Level 2 rooms according to the table below.
TIP To assign the same zone to more than one room, select the first room component, press Ctrl, and select
each additional room component. Then, use the Element Properties dialog to assign the zone. To clear a selection,
press SHIFT and select the room component to clear.
Office 6 zone 1
Office 7 zone 2
Office 8 zone 3
Office 33 zone 4
Office 32 zone 5
Office 29 zone 7
Office 26 zone 9
Lounge 25 zone 10
Open 2 zone 11
■ Create a new mechanical HVAC view based on 1 - Mech and name it 1 - Mech Zones.
■ Copy the room tags from the Level 1 architectural floor plan and paste them (using Paste Aligned)
into the 1 - Mech Zones view.
23 In the 1 - Mech Zones view, assign zones to the rooms according to the following table:
Office 3 zone 14
Office 18 zone 16
Office 12 zone 19
Office 11 zone 20
Open 1 zone 22
NOTE After finishing each exercise, you can choose to save your work. However, it is highly recommended that
you always begin each exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides. This dataset includes the work
from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.
In this exercise, you created new views by duplicating and renaming existing views. You then copied room tags into
the new views, and created a shared project parameter. Using this project parameter, you assigned zones to the level 1
and level 2 rooms. In the next exercise, you assign color scheme to these newly assigned zones in preparation for laying
out a VAV duct system.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click
2 - Mech Zones to make it the active view.
2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area.
This displays the entire floor plan and centers it in the drawing area.
3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Color Scheme Legend.
NOTE If the Drafting tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click Drafting.
8 Click OK twice.
9 Move the cursor in the drawing area and notice that the color scheme legend outline indicates that no
color scheme has been assigned to the view.
The color scheme outline follows the cursor movement to help you accurately position the legend.
10 Position the color scheme legend outline at the top-right corner of the floor plan, and click to place the
legend.
11 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog, select Number for Color Scheme, and click OK.
You applied the color scheme but it is based on room number. Next, you modify the color scheme so that
it is based on zones.
12 Select the color scheme legend, and on the Options Bar, click Edit Color Scheme.
13 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog, under Scheme Definition, do the following:
■ For Color, select Zone, and click OK after a message informs you that colors are not preserved when
changing a parameter.
■ Verify that By value is selected.
Colors are automatically assigned to the 24 zones that you previously defined.
14 Click OK.
NOTE Rooms that do not have zones assigned to them display as white. Also note that elevations have been
hidden in the view to enhance legend visibility.
Next, you create and modify the color scheme for level 1.
15 In the Project Browser, double-click 1 - Mech Zones to make it the active view.
16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Color Scheme Legend, and verify that Color Scheme Legend
: HVAC is selected in the Type Selector.
17 Position and insert the color scheme legend along the right side of the floor plan as you did in the 2 - Mech
Zones view.
The color scheme legend outline indicates that no color scheme has been assigned. This is because color
schemes are view specific, so you will need to assign a color scheme to this view. Notice that the HVAC
color scheme legend that you previously created is selected in the Type Selector.
18 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog, select Number for Color Scheme, and click OK.
The color scheme legend that you defined for level 2 is automatically applied.
Notice that the color for zone 22 (Open 1) is similar to that of zone 15 (Offices 4 and 5) and needs to be
changed for visual clarity.
TIP Color names are displayed under Name in the Color box.
In this exercise, you defined a new color scheme and applied it to the rooms in your building according to the zone
that you previously assigned each room. You also edited a color scheme for visual clarity. In the next exercise, you
perform an energy analysis to estimate building energy usage.
NOTE This setting must be configured to perform an accurate energy analysis. During an energy analysis, if you
receive warnings indicating that the compute room volumes option is not checked and the output will be
approximate, verify that Compute room volumes is selected.
3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Heating and Cooling Loads.
NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click Mechanical.
4 Click the Building tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog, and do the following:
You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking (Browser Building
Construction Settings).
■ For Building Service (Default Room Service), verify that VAV - Single Duct is selected.
■ For Place and Location, verify that Boston, MA is selected.
IMPORTANT Revit MEP stores the building information as project information. You can also access the building
information by clicking Settings menu ➤ Project Information. Then, under Energy Analysis, click Edit for Energy
Data.
You have verified the building information. Next, you view various rooms in the building. In the preview
pane of the Heating and Cooling dialog, notice that the rooms in the building display.
View rooms
5 While pressing SHIFT and the mouse scroll wheel, spin the view to verify the rooms (energy surfaces) in the
building.
Next, you need to view specific rooms.
6 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog, click the Rooms tab.
7 Select Level 1 for Level.
Each level that contains at least one room is listed under Level. Rooms are then listed for the selected
level.You can also select all levels that contain at least one room to list all of the rooms in the building.
8 Select 16 Office.
9 Click (Highlight).
NOTE Using the View Selector, you can select Wireframe or Shading for model graphics style. If you select
Shading, the rooms display in blue. The View Selector is located at the bottom left corner of the preview pane.
Also note that you click to dynamically modify (spin, pan, and zoom) the view in the preview pane as
you can in the drawing window or you can use your mouse.
10 With the Highlight tool active, select a different room or multiple rooms on a level to highlight them.
Remember that you may need to spin the view to see a selected room in the model.
TIP You can select multiple rooms by pressing CTRL-selecting them, or SHIFT-select a range of rooms. You can
also press CTRL+A to select all rooms on a level.
14 Click (Isolate).
15 With the Isolate tool active, select a different room or rooms on any level to isolate that them.
19 Using the methods that you learned, verify the room information for the other rooms in the building.
TIP If you select multiple rooms that have different room type, room construction, or room service values, these
values on the Room tab will be blank. Make your room information selections based on your specifications.
IMPORTANT Revit MEP stores the room information as room properties. You can also access the room information
by selecting a room in the drawing area, right-clicking, and clicking Element Properties. The room information
is located under Energy Analysis.
Now that the building and room information has been verified, you can perform an energy analysis.
20 Click Calculate.
Revit MEP performs the building calculations for heating and cooling in partnership with IES (Integrated
Environmental Solutions).
RELATED <Virtual Environment> allows you to either export the building and room information to the IES <VE>
program to perform an energy analysis and create an IES model, or import the IES model that has already been
created.
After the energy analysis is completed, the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes, and the Loads Report
Summary displays.
NOTE You must perform a new energy analysis each time you change building or room parameters, otherwise
the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes.
TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports.
In this exercise, you specified building and room information, and viewed room to verify room boundaries. You then
performed an energy analysis on your building and viewed an energy analysis report. This concludes the planning
stage of the systems project. In the next lesson, you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the rooms.
IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems.
After completing the air systems lesson, you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design
the piping systems.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Ceiling Plans, and double-click
1 - Ceiling Mech to make it the active view.
2 Right-click in the drawing area, and click View Properties.
You can also select the 1 - Ceiling Mech view in the Project Browser and click (Properties).
4 Scroll down to the Extents category and click Edit for View Range.
■ Under Primary Range, for the Top parameter, verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected, and
enter 2615 mm for Offset.
You specify 2615mm so that your view captures the air terminals (which will be located at the ceiling
height of 2600mm) and not other system components that may be above the air terminals and in the
same level. These components would obstruct your view of the air terminals.
■ Under Primary Range, for the Cut plane parameter, enter 0 for Offset.
■ Under View Depth, for the Level parameter, verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected, and enter
2615 for Offset.
NOTE When entering a value, you do not need to type measurement symbols instead, enter the value, and
press Tab. For example, you can enter 2600 and press Tab for 2600mm.
6 Click OK twice.
You will now use this ceiling plan to place the level 1 air terminals.
TIP When you click Modify, the command in progress terminates. You can also press Esc to accomplish this.
15 With the air terminal selected, click (Move) on the Edit toolbar.
TIP To use the Move tool, you first specify a start point on the component that you want to move and then you
specify an end point for the destination. The start point aligns with the end point when the move is completed.
16 Move the cursor to the bottom right corner of the air terminal, and after the (geometry) end point snap
displays, click to specify the move start point.
17 In the drawing area, move the cursor in Office 3 located in the upper left corner of the floor plan, and after
the mid point snap displays, click the center mid point of the ceiling grid to specify the move end point
as shown.
18 With the Office 3 air terminal selected, click (Copy) on the Edit toolbar.
TIP You use the same procedure with the Copy tool as with the Move tool. First specify a copy start point on
the component that you want to copy and then specify the copy end point (or destination).
19 On the Options Bar, verify that Constrain is cleared and Copy is selected, then select Multiple.
Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the air terminal without reactivating the Copy tool after
each placement.
20 Select the bottom-right corner of the air terminal as the copy start point, and then click the center mid
point of the Office 4 and then of the Office 5 ceiling grids to specify copy end points.
TIP You can enter SM to override all other snaps and display mid point snaps only. Note that snap overrides
deactivate after you make a selection.
24 In the Type Selector, select M_Return Air Diffuser : M_600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection.
25 Using the same placement method and offset parameter (2600mm), place 3 return air terminals in the
open office (Open 1) to the left of the restrooms, and specify a 150 L/s airflow for each of them.
TIP Notice that each air terminal type is identified by a different symbol.
27 Select the Office 3 supply air terminal and use the Copy tool to place a copy below the Men’s Room in the
Open 1 area.
28 Select the air terminal that you just placed, right-click, and click Element Properties.
29 In the Element Properties dialog, under Mechanical, clear the UpFlowArrow check box, and click OK.
32 Using the placement method that you learned for level 1, do the following for level 2:
After you finish the level 2 air terminal layout, collapse the ceiling plan views in the Project Browser. You
will be using different views to design the systems. The completed level 2 air terminal layout is as shown.
■ Verify that Schedule building components is selected, and that Show categories from all disciplines is
cleared.
■ Click OK.
Define columns
3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select Flow, and click Add to
add the Flow field to the list of scheduled fields to include in the schedule.
4 Under Select available fields from, select Room.
Notice that the content of the Available fields list changes to fields associated with rooms.
5 While pressing Ctrl, and select the following fields from the Available fields list:
■ Room: Number
■ Room: Name
■ Flow
■ Room: Actual Supply Airflow
10 Click OK.
The Check Supply Airflow calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list) and
will display as a column in the schedule.
11 On the Formatting tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, in the Fields list, select Check Supply Airflow,
and click Conditional Format.
12 In the Conditional Formatting dialog, do the following:
■ Click the Background Color and select Green in the Color dialog.
■ Click OK twice.
The Check Supply Airflow calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine the rooms that
meet the design requirements as they are green in the schedule. These rooms have a difference between
the actual airflow and the calculated airflow within the range of -35 L/s and 35 L/s.
14 With the Air Terminal Schedule view active, click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows.
This closes all open windows that are hidden by the schedule.
NOTE If a different project is also open, click Window menu and select the project to make it the active view,
and click File menu ➤ Close to close the project.
15 In the Project Browser, under Views ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, double-click 1 - Mech to make
it the active view.
16 Enter ZR, and draw a zoom region around Office 4 located on the left outer wall of the floor plan.
17 Enter WT to tile the 2 views.
The schedule and the floor plan display simultaneously in the drawing area.
18 In the schedule, select the 150 L/s Flow parameter (in the Flow column) for the Office 4 air terminal.
A cursor displays in the selected cell in the schedule enabling you to modify the parameter, and if you click
in the floor plan to make it active, the selected air terminal displays in red.
Notice that the Flow column parameters are the only parameters that you can define in the schedule. The
other parameters are design or calculated parameters.
NOTE After you select and modify data in a schedule, the associated system component is immediately selected
and modified in the project as if you used the Element Properties dialog. This allows you to use schedules to
make multiple modifications in one view. These changes dynamically propagate throughout your project because
you are changing the digital database of building information.
20 Modify the other Flow parameters for the supply air terminals so that the airflow design requirements are
met.
NOTE Do not modify the return or exhaust air terminals as these are not supply air terminals and do not affect
the supply airflow.
After you modify the airflow parameters, all Check Supply Airflow parameters display in green.
IMPORTANT By modifying each supply air terminal airflow parameter, you are changing the air terminal
connector size. Air terminal connector sizes are used to calculate airflow but are also used to calculate ductwork
sizing.
21 Close the schedule view, and maximize the 1 - Mech floor plan view.
In this exercise, you created a schedule to assess airflow for each room in the building. You then used this schedule as
a design tool to modify the airflow so that it meets the design requirements. You modified the airflow parameters
directly in the schedule and all changes occurred dynamically and propagated throughout the project. This occurred
because you were modifying the digital database of building information that the project sources. This is the power of
BIM.
In the next exercise, you create air systems.
IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either to a system that you create or to a default system. Unlike
logical connections, physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. However, they are necessary to
perform calculations that reference the physical geometry such as sizing.
Dataset
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click
1 - Mech to make it the active view.
2 Right-click in the drawing window, and click View Properties.
3 In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, click Edit for View Range.
4 In the View Range dialog, do the following:
■ Verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected for the view range parameters.
■ Under Primary Range, for the Top parameter, enter an Offset value of 3000.
5 Click OK twice.
You use multiple views to clearly and effectively communicate different systems information. Different
building professionals use different views during the course of the building project. You will create the
level 1 supply air systems in the 1 - Mech view.
TIP You can also press F9 (Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. If the System
Browser does not respond, click in the drawing area to make it active, then press F9.
7 Expand the Unassigned systems folder, and expand each default systems to view all of the air terminals
that you placed in the building.
Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems.
8 With the view active, enter ZR, and sketch a zoom region around Office 3 located in the top-left corner
of the floor plan.
The cursor changes to a magnifying glass when Zoom in Region is activated.
TIP Although this view does not contain room tags, you can identify a room by placing the cursor over the room
component. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the room name
and number. If desired, you can add room tags to the mechanical floor plans using the Room Tag tool on the
Mechanical tab of the Design Bar.
The offset value places the VAV box in the plenum space (between the level 1 ceiling and the level 2 floor
and above the level 1 air terminals). This VAV box services only Office 3 so the VAV airflow equals that of
the air terminal. Notice that the VAV box listing is placed in the Unassigned folder under the Default
Supply Air system in the System Browser. This is because you have yet to assign it to a system.
IMPORTANT After you select a system component, system specific tools display on the Options Bar.
16 On the Options Bar, click (Select Equipment for System), and select the VAV box.
Notice that only mechanical equipment highlight and can be selected when using the Select Equipment
for System tool.
TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area, and cleared from the Options Bar, select an air terminal
that you added to the system. This system tool displays along with the other Options Bar system tools.
Next you create the ductwork to physically connect the air system components (air terminal and VAV).
IMPORTANT The new system named Mechanical Supply Air 1 is now listed in the System Browser under Supply
Air in the Mechanical folder. The organization is from upstream, the VAV (the parent) to downstream, the air
terminal (the child) with the system between (connecting) them. Notice that the air terminal listing moved to
the assigned system but the VAV box is also listed under Unassigned. This is because you have yet to assign the
VAV primary and return air connections to their systems. They remain assign to their respective default systems,
Default Supply Air and Default Return Air.
TIP If you click in the drawing area and the highlighted system clears, place the cursor over the Office 3 air
terminal and press Tab, and select the system. You can also right-click the Mechanical Supply Air 1 listing in the
System Browser, and click Select to select the system.
17 With the new system selected, click Layout Path on the Options Bar.
The Layout Path tab appears on the Design Bar providing various layout tools. Notice that Solutions is
selected.
You can also view possible layout path solutions by pressing the left and right arrow keys on your keyboard.
■ Verify that Rectangular Duct: Radius Elbows / Taps is selected for Duct Type.
■ Enter 2900mm for Offset.
23 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog, select Branch.
24 Under System Type: Supply Air, do the following:
■ Verify that Rectangular Duct: Radius Elbows / Taps is selected for Duct Type.
■ Enter 2900 for Offset.
■ Select Flex Duct Round : Flex - Round for Flex Duct Type.
■ Verify that 1800 is selected for Maximum Flex Duct Length.
25 Click OK.
NOTE Configuring the duct conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them
during your project. You can also configure these settings in the Mechanical Settings dialog by clicking Mechanical
Settings on the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar (or Settings ➤ Mechanical Settings) before beginning your
project. For more information, refer to Help.
26 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Layout.
The physical connection composed of ducts and fittings is created.
NOTE All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. For
example, a transition connecting the elbow was automatically added, as was the elbow itself.
IMPORTANT Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. This is because the System Browser
lists system components and systems. The ductwork is a physical not a logical connection, thus it is not part of
the system. For example, you can delete ductwork and the system remains.
27 On the View Control Bar located below the bottom left of the drawing area, select Medium for Detail Level.
The duct geometry now displays in 2-line enabling you to better view the ductwork.
Note that the arrow over the duct is the diffuser airflow display arrow and not the supply airflow direction
in the duct.
28 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights, and press Tab twice.
The system components and ductwork highlight indicating that they are physically connected.
IMPORTANT When multiple ducts and fittings are connected, you check connectivity by moving the cursor
over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then press Tab. The first time you press Tab, the branch to
which the duct is connected highlights. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected
ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of
connected ducts, fittings, and equipment. If the entire network does not highlight, then you know that a
disconnection exists. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. You can repair
the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then
dragging it back again to reconnect. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between
the components that make the connection. Rerouting usually correct this issue.
29 Place the cursor over the duct, and press Tab twice to highlight the duct and the air terminal, and click to
select them.
Do not highlight or select the VAV box.
IMPORTANT The Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. It does not report the sizing
settings of the selected duct.
32 Click in the drawing area, enter ZR, and sketch a zoom region around Offices 4 and 5 (the offices
immediately below Office 3).
33 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Mechanical Equipment.
34 In the Type Selector, select M_Parallel Fan Powered VAV : M_Size 3 - 200mm Inlet.
35 Move the cursor to the right of the Office 4 door, press Spacebar twice to rotate VAV box 180 degrees, click
to place the VAV box, and click Modify on the Basics tab of the Design Bar.
36 In the left column of the System Browser, in the Unassigned folder under Default Supply Air, double-click
the second VAV box listed.
You can also right-click the second VAV box listed, and click Element Properties.
IMPORTANT Remember that all system components that you have not assigned to a system are placed in the
Unassigned folder in the System Browser.
37 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, enter 2900mm for Offset, and enter 350 L/s for
AirFlow, and click OK.
This VAV airflow is the total airflow from the Office 4 and Office 5 air terminals.
TIP You can verify the airflow for the air terminals by opening the Air Terminal Schedule that you created in a
past exercise, or select an air terminal and the airflow displays on the Options Bar.
NOTE After you select a system component, the selected component and its connector(s) highlight.
39 Place the cursor over the diffuser connector, right-click, and click Create Supply Air System from the context
menu.
You can also select the diffuser and click (Create Supply Air System) on the Options Bar.
NOTE Remember that after select Create Supply Air System from the context menu or click on the
Options Bar, a new system is immediately created. This system includes the selected system component(s). You
can verify this new system in the System Browser.
41 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar, click Add To System.
System components that were not selected for this system are grayed out.
45 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar, click Select Equipment.
46 Place the cursor over the VAV box located outside Office 4.
Notice that the cursor changes indicating that Select Equipment is active.
48 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar, click Finish System.
49 Place your cursor over the Office 4 rectangular diffuser and press Tab to display the new system.
54 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Layout.
Ignore the warning reporting that no auto-route solution was found. You can click in the drawing area to
close the warning.
The ductwork physically connecting the system components is created.
Notice that the main is open and an endcap is needed to close the duct. This was the reason for the warning
message.
Add an endcap
59 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool.
60 Place the cursor over the duct, and press Tab twice to highlight the duct and the air terminals, and click to
select them.
Do not highlight or select the VAV box.
IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. It does not
report the sizing settings of the selected duct.
63 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights, and press Tab twice.
The VAV box, air terminals, and ductwork highlight indicating that they are physically connected.
Next, you create a low pressure secondary air system in which you modify the layout path and add a new
system component to it. However, this time you will add the component after the ductwork has been
created.
64 Right-click in the drawing area, click Zoom in Region from the context menu.
65 In the 1 - Mech view, sketch a zoom region around the air terminals in Open 1 (the large open space).
66 Use your mouse scroll wheel to adjust the view as shown below.
73 While pressing CTRL, select the 5 air terminals to the right of the VAV.
Do not select the air terminal in the upper-right corner. You will add this later.
The selected diffusers highlight in red.
The new system named Mechanical Supply Air 3 is now listed in the System Browser under Supply Air in
the Mechanical folder. Notice that the selected diffusers are included in the system.
TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area, and the red system display cleared, place the cursor over one of
the air terminals in the system, and press TAB once to highlight the system. Then, click to select the system.
You have logically connected the air system components. Next, you create the ductwork to physically the
system components.
77 With the system selected, click Layout Path on the Options Bar.
78 On the Options Bar, do the following:
IMPORTANT Layout Path provides 2 drag controls enabling you to modify the layout. The parallel control
(horizontal and vertical arrows) move the layout horizontally and vertically. The end control points (dots) moves
the layout ends in any direction.
81 Click the parallel drag control and drag the left section of the main down until it snaps creating a straight
path to the VAV.
82 Repeat this procedure and snap the right section of the main creating a straight main to the VAV.
83 With Modify selected on the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar, select each of the 2 branches and drag
them to their new locations as shown.
NOTE If flex duct is created instead of duct fittings, the branch path is too close to the diffuser. Undo the layout,
and reuse the Layout Path to modify the branch layout.
A change has occurred in the air system design, and you will need to add an air terminal to this system
and connect it to the existing ductwork.
IMPORTANT After system components (air terminals, mechanical equipment, and so on) are logically connected
by a system and ductwork is created, you can select the duct or component to display system controls on the
Options Bar. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection).
86 On the Edit Systems tab of the Design Bar, click Add to System.
87 Select the upper-right diffuser to add it to the system.
88 On the Edit Systems tab of the Design Bar, click Finish System.
TIP You can also add a system component (air terminal, VAV, and so on) to a system by right-clicking the system
component connector and selecting Add to System from the context menu. Then, select a system component
that is already part of a system. The new system component is now part of the same system.
89 Place the cursor over the new diffuser and press TAB once to highlight the logical connection.
Next, you need to manually modify the ductwork to physically connect the diffuser.
90 Use the mouse scroll wheel and zoom in on the end of the ductwork.
91 While pressing CTRL, and working from the end of the main, select the transition, duct segment, elbow,
and the other duct segment.
93 Zoom the view, select the transition fitting, and locate the top connector.
94 Drag the connector (and flex duct) straight down toward the diffuser to shorten the flex duct length and
provide sufficient space to create the duct.
NOTE If you are moving the transition fitting only, then you are dragging the lower connector. Undo and drag
the top transition connector to relocate the fitting and flex duct.
At this point, you can right-click the connector, and click Draw Duct on the context menu to draw the
duct. However, continue using the Layout Path tool. You will draw duct in the next exercise.
95 Zoom out the view, and select an air terminal in the system to display the system tools on the Options
Bar.
96 Click Layout Path on the Options Bar.
97 On the Options Bar, do the following:
98 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Layout.
The new ductwork is created. Ignore the warning message.
Due to the takeoff based duct type, the main is open and it requires an endcap to close the duct. This caused
the warning message to display.
Add an endcap
100 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Duct Fitting.
101 In the Type Selector, select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : M_Standard.
102 Move the cursor over the end of the main, and after the end point snap displays, click to place the endcap.
103 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool.
104 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights, and press Tab twice.
The system components and ductwork highlight indicating that they are physically connected.
TIP Depending on your ductwork layout, you may need to press TAB 2 or 3 times to check connectivity.
105 Right-click the VAV box, and click Element Properties from the context menu.
106 Under Mechanical - Airflow, change the airflow to 990 L/s.
You need to change the airflow because you added an air terminal to the system.
107 Place the cursor over the main duct, and click TAB twice to highlight the duct and diffusers but not the
VAV, and click to select them.
This low pressure secondary air system ductwork is sized using the Friction method at .65 Pascals per one
meter of ductwork. Other sizing methods and values can also be used as well.
IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. It does not
report the sizing settings of the selected duct.
Next, you complete the low pressure secondary supply air systems for level 1.
110 In the Project Browser, under Mechanical, double-click 1 - Mech floor plan to make it the active view.
111 Using the systems creation methods that you learned, complete the level 1 system layout according to the
following specifications and floor plan layout:
■ M_Parallel Fan Powered VAV : M_Size 3 - 200mm Inlet with a 2900mm offset. Reposition and rotate
if necessary.
■ For VAV airflow, specify the air terminal airflow. If multiple air terminals are connected to a system,
specify the total air terminal airflow for VAV airflow.
IMPORTANT Remember that when creating layouts and sizing duct, you are creating and sizing the physical
duct and not altering the logical system. So, if a layout solution or duct sizing causes errors or it seems incorrect,
it is because either the duct usually has insufficient space, an offset elevation is incorrectly specified, or the duct
or duct fittings are not connected properly. You can either relocate the VAV box, modify the layout, select a
different layout solution using the Layout Path tool, modify the duct manually, or reinsert duct fittings. You
should always check duct connectivity after modifying ductwork.
The completed level 1 secondary supply air systems are shown below. Note that created ductwork may
vary slightly from the illustration.
Next, you create the low pressure secondary supply air systems for level 2.
112 Use the 2 - Mech mechanical floor plan view. Verify that Associate Level (Level 2) is selected for all View
Range parameters, set the Primary Range Top Offset to 3000mm and the Detail Level to Medium.
113 Using the systems creation methods that you learned for level 1, create the level 2 system and duct layout
according to the following specifications and floor plan layout:
■ M_Parallel Fan Powered VAV : M_Size 3 - 200mm Inlet with a 2900mm offset. Reposition and rotate
if necessary.
The completed level 2 secondary supply air systems are shown below. Again note that the created ductwork
may vary slightly from the illustration.
114 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save.
115 In the Save As dialog, enter Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems Training for File name, navigate
to the folder of your choice, and click Save.
In this exercise, you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. You used the Create Supply
Air Systems tool to logically connect the air terminals to the VAV boxes. You also modified a system by adding an air
terminal to an existing system. After creating each system, you used the Layout Path tool to create and modify duct
layouts to physically connect the system components. You also specified VAV airflow, checked duct connectivity, sized
the ductwork, and validated the systems in the System Browser. In the next exercise, you create 2 different views to
validate the ductwork geometry.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click
1 - Mech to make it the active view.
2 Right-click in the empty space of the drawing area, and click Zoom to Fit.
This zooms the view to fit the drawing area.
3 Place the cursor in the drawing area, enter ZR, and sketch a zoom region around Offices 3, 4, and 5.
TIP Although room tags were not copied when you created this view, you can identify a room by placing the
cursor over the room component. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar)
confirm the room name and number.
5 Place the cursor just above the Office 3 air terminal and click to set the start point for the section, move
the cursor down and click just below the Office 5 air terminal to set the end point.
A new section view named Section 1 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???.
6 In the Project Browser, expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section), right-click Section 1, and
click Properties.
7 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select HVAC for Sub Discipline, and click OK.
The section relocates under HVAC.
9 Using the shape handles (triangles) on the far right, drag the clip planes of the view so that you capture
only the systems that you created and set the depth just past the VAV boxes as shown.
You many need to zoom out to view the shape handles.
13 Use the mouse scroll wheel and zoom in on the bottom-right duct servicing offices 4 and 5, and verify that
the geometry and location of the duct that you created is as you expect it to be.
NOTE A section box allows you to limit the view so that you can target only the geometry that you want to
view. It is especially helpful in 3D views in which the three dimensional space makes it difficult to view some
geometry.
21 In the drawing area, click the section box and locate the top center drag handle.
TIP Release the drag handle at certain points to see a preview of the section at the current crop boundary
position.
26 Zoom in on each air system to verify that the geometry and location of the systems that you created are
as you expect them to be.
3D views allow you to validate geometry of multiple duct runs in a three dimensional space by using the
zoom and spin controls. You will use both section and 3D views during your systems designing.
In this exercise you created a section view and used a 3D view to validate the secondary supply air system duct geometry.
In the next exercise, you draw the primary supply air system ductwork.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click
1 - Mech to make it the active view.
2 Enter ZR, and sketch a zoom region around Mechanical/Electrical room.
6 Place the cursor in the Mechanical/Electrical room until a snap displays aligning to the furthermost left
partition of the Ladies’ Room above, and click to specify the start point.
8 Press Enter to specify the end point of the first duct segment.
9 Move the cursor straight down and draw the second duct segment 9800mm, and click to specify the end
point.
10 Now, move the cursor down and 45 degrees to the right, and after the listening dimensions appear, enter
11000, and press Enter to specify the third segment end point.
11 Finally, move the cursor to the right, and after the listening dimensions appear, enter 3000, and press Enter
to specify the third segment end point.
13 Enter ZR, and sketch a zoom region around the VAV box outside of Office 3.
14 Place the cursor over the Office 3 VAV box supply air connection, after the connector snap displays, click
to specify the start point.
the connector snap to quickly and accurately locate a connector. If you pause briefly, a tooltip appears
confirming the connector.
15 Move the cursor to the right to begin drawing duct, and press Spacebar to automatically change the duct
diameter and offset to match the 200mm VAV primary connector diameter.
You can also change the duct diameter from the Options Bar.
TIP When drawing duct, press the Spacebar after you specify your start point and move the cursor to begin
drawing duct. This automatically specifies the duct diameter or width and height, and offset parameter to match
that of the selected start point object. If a warning appears informing you that the line is too short, you pressed
Spacebar before you began drawing duct. Note that the Spacebar does not automatically specify the duct type.
You should always verify the duct type in the Type Selector.
16 Draw the first duct segment 600mm to the right, and click to specify the end point.
17 Move the cursor down and draw a 2450mm vertical second duct segment, and press Enter to specify the
end point.
TIP When connecting duct to the centerline of another duct, the centerline snap makes the process quick and
easy.
After you click to specify the end point, the duct run connecting the Office 3 VAV to the primary is complete.
19 With the Draw tool open, zoom in on the VAV box outside of Office 4.
20 Place the cursor over the Office 4 VAV box supply air connection, and after the connector snap displays,
click to specify the start point.
21 Draw the duct to the right and connect it to the centerline of the primary.
23 Zoom in on the Office 18 VAV box located in the lower-middle of the level 1 floor plan.
Remember that you quickly locate a room by highlighting the room component and viewing the room
tag information on a tooltip and on the Status Bar.
24 Select the Office 18 VAV, and place the cursor over the primary supply air connector.
TIP If you right-click a connector and click Draw Duct on the context menu, the duct diameter, or width and
height, and offset automatically match that of the selected connector. However, you should always verify the
duct type in the Type Selector.
31 The 5 secondary supply air system duct runs are now physically connected to the primary.
Check connectivity
32 Place the cursor over the primary duct and press Tab twice to check connectivity up to but not including
the VAV boxes.
33 Validate the primary duct geometry using the Section 1 and 3D Mech views.
NOTE Do not size the primary at this time, you will do that in a later exercise.
IMPORTANT Notice that the VAV boxes are still listed in the Unassigned folder under Default Supply Air. This
is because you physically connected the VAVs to the primary duct but you have not logically connected the VAVs
with a system. You will create a system for the primary and add the VAVs to it in a later exercise.
34 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click
1-Mech to make it the active view.
35 Using the duct drawing methods that you learned, complete the level 1 primary duct according to the
following specifications and floor plan layout:
■ Draw the primary duct using Round Duct : Taps. The main has a 300mm diameter and the connections
to the VAV boxes have a diameter of 200mm. On the Options Bar, specify a 2900mm offset, and verify
that Auto Connect is selected, and Angle is cleared. Use approximate duct segment lengths from the
layout below.
■ Do not connect the Office 11 VAV because a routing conflict exists. You will connect this VAV in a
later exercise.
■ Do not size the primary. You will size the primary in a later exercise.
■ Check connectivity, and use the Section 1 and 3D Mech views for duct geometry validation.
IMPORTANT Remember that when drawing duct, you may encounter errors when connecting to the primary
duct or a VAV. This is usually caused by insufficient space preventing duct creation or fitting insertion. Modify
the duct length or relocate the VAV box to make sufficient space, and use the Draw Duct tool to reconnect.
Finally, remember to always check connectivity and validate the duct geometry.
36 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click
2 - Mech to make it the active view.
37 Using the duct drawing methods that you learned, complete the level 2 primary duct according to the
following specifications and floor plan layout:
■ Draw the primary duct using Round Duct : Taps. The main has a 300mm diameter and the connections
to the VAV boxes have a diameter of 200mm. On the Options Bar, specify a 2900mm offset, and verify
that Auto Connect is selected, and Angle is cleared. Use approximate duct segment lengths from the
layout below.
■ Do not connect the Office 26 VAV because a routing conflict exists. You will connect this VAV in a
later exercise.
■ Do not size the primary. You will size the primary in a later exercise.
■ Check connectivity, and use the Section 1 and 3D Mech views for duct geometry validation.
In this exercise, you used the Duct tool to manually draw the high pressure primary supply air duct and physically
connect the VAV boxes to the primary duct. You will connect the primary duct to AC units in a later exercise. While
drawing duct, you learned how to use connectors to create ductwork. Finally, you checked duct connectivity and
validated duct geometry using different views. In the next exercise, you resolve routing conflicts with the primary duct.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click
1- Mech to make it the active view.
2 Zoom in on the VAV box outside Office 11 located in the upper-right corner of the floor plan, and notice
that the duct run has an elbow that does not allow a connection from the VAV box to the primary.
5 Use the left and right arrow buttons on the Options Bar or to view the different routing solutions.
6 Select Solution 1, and click Finish.
7 Select the VAV box, and place the cursor over the primary supply air connector.
11 Place the cursor over the primary, and press TAB twice.
IMPORTANT Unlike the Layout Path tool which allows you to create entire duct layouts, the Routing Solutions
tool allows you to modify a specific segment of duct. Both tools provide a series of solutions and the ability to
modify those solutions.
13 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click
2 - Mech to make it the active view.
14 Zoom in on the Office 26 VAV box located in the upper-right corner of the floor plan.
15 Using the process that you just learned, select a routing solution to resolve the routing conflict that prevents
the Office 26 VAV box from connecting to the primary, then connect the VAV to the primary.
The routing solution and connection are shown below.
In this exercise, you used the Routing Solutions tool to resolve routing conflicts. You viewed various routing solutions
and selected the best solution to resolve 2 routing conflicts. After resolving the conflicts, you manually drew duct to
connect the VAV boxes to the primary duct. In the next exercise, you size the high pressure supply air primary duct.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click
1 - Mech to make it the active view.
2 Zoom in on the lower end of the left primary located outside Office 18.
The upper end of the primary duct run will connect to a rooftop AC unit.
NOTE It is highly recommended to zoom the view to accurately place the endcap.
NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click Mechanical.
6 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool.
IMPORTANT When sizing duct that has multiple open ends, you must place endcaps to close all open ends
except the one that connects to the air source. This determines the airflow direction and the duct will size
accurately.
8 Place the cursor on the left primary duct run and press Tab twice to highlight the entire run including the
VAV connections but not the VAV boxes, and click to select it.
IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. It does not
report the sizing settings of the selected duct.
IMPORTANT Remember that when creating layouts and sizing duct, you are creating and sizing the physical
duct and not altering the logical system. So, if a layout solution or duct sizing causes errors or it seems incorrect,
it is because either the duct usually has insufficient space, or duct or duct fittings are not connected properly.
You can either relocate the VAV box, modify the layout, select a different layout solution using the Layout Path
tool, modify the duct manually, or reinsert duct fittings. You should always check duct connectivity after modifying
ductwork.
11 Place the cursor over each left side of the primary duct run, and press TAB twice.
The primary and the connections to the VAVs highlight indicating that they are physically connected.
Next, you place an endcap on the right side of the primary in order size the duct.
12 Zoom in on the lower end of the right primary duct run located outside Office 17.
13 Using the process that you just learned, place a round duct endcap at the lower end of the right primary
duct run, and size this primary using the same sizing method and parameters that you used for the left
primary.
14 Using the method you have learned, check the connectivity of the right side of the primary duct run.
15 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click
2 - Mech to make it the active view.
16 Using the process that you learned for the level 1 primary duct run, place a round duct endcap on the
lower end of the left and right side of the primary duct run to determine airflow direction.
As in level 1, the upper ends of the primary duct run will connect to a rooftop AC unit.
17 Size both the left and right sides of the primary duct run using the same sizing method and parameters
that you used for the level 1 primary duct run.
18 Check connectivity for both sides of the primary duct.
The completed level 2 primary duct run is shown below.
In this exercise, you sized the primary duct for the building. First, you placed an endcap at the end of each side of the
primary duct run where no connection was planned. This determined the airflow direction inside the primary. Then,
you used the Duct Sizing tool to size the primary using the Velocity sizing method. In the next exercise, you assign a
color fill to the ductwork.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, right-click 1 -
Mech, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.
A new floor plan view called Copy of 1 - Mech is created and becomes the active view.
4 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Duct Color Scheme Legend.
NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click Mechanical.
5 In the Type Selector, verify that Color Scheme Legend : HVAC is selected for color scheme legend type.
Notice that you use the same duct color scheme legend type that you created in a previous exercise called
HVAC. Using the same color scheme legend type allows you to quickly assign consistent color scheme
legends throughout your design.
6 Move the cursor in the drawing area and notice that an outline of the color scheme legend indicates that
no color scheme has been assigned to the view displays.
7 Position the color scheme legend outline at the top-right corner of the floor plan, and click to place the
legend.
The color scheme outline follows the cursor movement to help you accurately position the legend.
9 In the Drawing area, select the duct color scheme legend that you placed, and on the Options Bar, click
Edit Color Scheme.
10 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog, do the following:
■ Select Velocity for Color, and click OK after a warning indicates that colors are not preserved.
■ Select By range.
■ In the At Least column, click in the second row, and enter 7.5 m/s.
■ In the Caption column, delete the existing text, and enter low velocity for the first row, and enter
high velocity for the second row.
■ In the Color column, click in the first row and select Green from the Basic colors in the Color box.
■ In the Color column, click in the second row and select Red from the Basic colors in the Color box.
TIP Color names are displayed under Name in the Color box.
■ Click OK.
11 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, right-click 2 -
Mech, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.
A new floor plan view called Copy of 2 - Mech is created and becomes the active view.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click
1 - Mech to make it the active view.
2 In the System Browser, expand the Mechanical systems folder.
TIP If the System Browser is closed, press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close it. If the
System Browser does not respond, click in the drawing area to make it active, then press F9.
All mechanical systems that have been created for the project are organized by system type in the Mechanical
folder. Remember that only systems (logical connections) and the assigned system components are in the
System Browser, not ductwork (physical connections).
5 In the Element(s) In View dialog, click Close to deactivate the Show tool.
Notice that the main duct connecting the VAV box to the diffusers is one size.
You need to reduce the size of the main to ensure that the air pressure meets airflow requirements. To
accomplish this, you split the main into multiple duct segments and then size each segment.
TIP When splitting duct in 2-line display, move the cursor along the top or bottom edge of the duct to view
the split line and the listening dimensions.
9 With the Split tool open, split the main to the left of the middle branch at 4300mm from the beginning
of the main.
11 Move the cursor over the main, and press Tab twice to highlight the ductwork and air terminals located
downstream from the VAV box, and click to select them. Note that the VAV box is not selected.
IMPORTANT Equal Friction sizing is an iterative process. The completion time varies according to the speed of
your computer.
NOTE If a Warning dialog opens alerting you that there is no loss defined, ignore this warning. You can click
anywhere in the drawing area to close it.
The low pressure secondary air system ductwork is sized using the Equal Friction method at .65 Pascals per
one meter of ductwork.
Notice that as the airflow decreases, transitions are automatically added to reduce duct size and maintain
air pressure. Next, you tag the main to annotate the duct segment sizes.
16 In the Tags dialog, under Category, for Ducts, verify that M_Duct Size Tag is loaded, and click Cancel.
17 Move the cursor over the 3 segments of the main, and notice that the tag outline dynamically displays the
size of each segment.
18 Position the tag outline in the center of each segment, and click to place each tag.
In this exercise, you sized low pressure secondary air system ductwork to more closely meet airflow requirements. First,
you used the Split tool to split the main into multiple segments, and then you sized the duct run using the Equal
Friction sizing method. Finally, you tagged the main to annotate the duct segment sizes. In the next exercise, you use
the System Inspector to check flow and pressure in the secondary air system that you just sized.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click
2 - Mech to make it the active view.
2 Right-click in the view, click Zoom in Region from the context menu.
3 Draw a zoom region around the lower-right secondary air system in Open 2.
4 Select the VAV box that you assigned to the secondary air system.
IMPORTANT To select a system, select any duct segment, duct fitting, diffuser, or mechanical equipment that
you have assigned to a system. System tools display on the Options Bar.
RELATED If you select a system component that has been assigned to more than one system such as an AC
unit or a VAV box and click , the Select System dialog opens enabling you to select a system to inspect.
Each selected system highlights in red enabling you to preview it.
NOTE You can also use System Inspector from in the System Browser. Right-click a system from the System
Browser, and click Inspect from the context menu. After the System Inspector opens, click Inspect from the
System Inspector tab on the Design Bar.
7 Place the cursor over the upper-left flex duct branch of the secondary air system to highlight it.
An inspection flag dynamically reports the airflow, pressure, and pressure loss in the highlighted duct
segment. Arrows display on the duct indicating the airflow direction for both the main and the branches
in the air system. A tooltip also displays the system information.
Notice that the secondary air system and the assigned system components highlight and can be selected
but you cannot select other secondary air systems or the primary duct run. These are not logically connected
to this system.
Next, you inspect 2 areas of the air system to compare information.
8 With the cursor over the upper-left duct segment, click to temporarily place the inspection flag on segment.
9 Place the cursor over the middle duct segment to compare the airflow and pressure information with that
of the upper-left duct segment.
10 Click to place the current inspection flag and close the prior one.
11 Move the cursor over the upper-right air terminal to compare its information with that of the middle duct
segment.
You can continue to use this method to compare inspection information for system components or duct
across the selected system.
12 Click a blank space in the view to close the current inspection flag.
14 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Inspector to deactivate the System Inspector.
15 Use the System Inspector to inspect other secondary air systems in the project.
NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork, the selected system
components or duct must be logically and physically connected. Ductwork and system components must be
connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). For
example, you cannot inspect the primary high pressure duct run because you have not created a system for it.
The primary is physically but not logically connected. In a later exercise, you will create a system for the primary
and then you can inspect the primary duct run.
In this exercise, you used the System Inspector to inspect the airflow direction, airflow, and pressure information for
various systems in the project. You learned that airflow and pressure information is specific to the selected system
component, and that all system information is color-coded for either the duct main or the branch. You also compared
system information across a system. In the next exercise, you place 2 AC units.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Architectural ➤ New Construction ➤ Floor Plans,
right-click Roof, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.
A new view called Copy of Roof is created and becomes the active view.
7 In the Roof Mechanical view, enter ZR, and sketch a zoom region around Men’s Room (located below the
Mechanical/Electrical room).
You need to place the AC unit that services level 2 on the roof above the Men’s Room.
11 Snap to the lower end point of the horizontal partition wall in the Men’s Room as shown.
Zoom in if necessary to locate the lower end point snap.
12 Click to place the AC unit, and then click Modify on the Design Bar.
16 Move the cursor to the right, and after the cursor is past the AC unit, click to specify the section end point.
A new section view named Section 2 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???.
17 In the Project Browser, expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section), right-click Section 2, and
click Properties.
18 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select HVAC for Sub Discipline, and click OK.
The section relocates under HVAC ➤ Sections (Building Section).
24 Zoom in on the AC unit and watch the level indicators, notice that the unit is located on the roof level
and not on the roof surface.
NOTE As with air terminals and VAV boxes, AC units are level-based components. Notice that the roof level is
not referencing the roof surface but the underside of the roof. To place the AC unit on the roof surface, you must
relocate it.
27 Move the cursor up along the left edge of the AC unit, and after the intersection and centerline snaps
display at the roof surface, (300mm directly above the start point), click to specify the move end point.
This specifies the AC unit offset level of 300mm which moves the AC unit to the roof surface.
TIP You can also specify the offset level in the Element Properties dialog.
28 Using the methods that you learned, place an AC unit for the level 1 supply air system according to the
following specifications and procedures:
■ Work in the Roof Mech view, and place a M_Rooftop AC Unit 15 - 25 Ton - Bottom Return Connection
: M_15 Ton above the Mechanical/Electrical room. First rotate the unit so that the return connection
is at the top. Then snap the top edge of the AC unit to the upper mechanical room wall and click to
place it. Use the Move tool, and move the top edge of the AC unit 500mm down. Next, use the Align
tool (on the Tools toolbar) to align the left edge of the level 1 AC unit to the left edge of the level 2
AC unit. (Remember to select the reference edge first). The AC unit placement is shown below.
Note that you must locate this AC unit above the Mechanical/Electrical room to allow the supply and
return air duct riser to pass through the level 2 Mechanical/Electrical room and into the level 1 plenum
space below.
■ Create a new section view above the AC unit as shown below, and adjust the depth view clip plane to
capture the level 1 AC unit only. Remember to relocate the view in the Project Browser as you did with
the Section 2 view.
In this exercise, you added 2 rooftop AC units to the design. You created 2 section views and used the Move and the
Align tools to relocate the AC units to the roof surface. In the next exercise, you connect the AC units to the high
pressure primary supply air ductwork.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views, and double-click
3D Mech to make the view active.
2 Select the section box, and drag the center drag handle up to move the crop boundary past the roof.
If you like, you can drag the bottom set of drag handles up above the level 1 system to hide that system.
Remember that, if you do this, you will need to reset this boundary to validate the level 1 supply air system
later.
TIP You can also press Shift-middle mouse button, and drag the mouse to spin the model.
Next, you tile the Roof Mech and the 3D Mech views so that you can work on and validate your system
design simultaneously.
5 With the 3D Mech view active, click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows.
This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session. Note that if this
option is unavailable, the active view is the only open window.
TIP When tiling 2 views, the active view is tiled to the left.
You are ready to create the duct riser for the level 2 supply air system.
Draw the supply duct riser from the AC Unit to the level 2 plenum space
TIP When drawing duct, press the Spacebar after you specify your start point and move the cursor to begin
drawing duct. This automatically specifies the duct diameter or width and height, and offset parameter to match
that of the selected start point object. If a warning appears informing you that the line is too short, you did not
begin drawing duct before pressing Spacebar You should always verify the duct type in the Type Selector.
IMPORTANT When setting offset parameters for system components, Revit MEP offsets the selected component
from the reference level and not its location. If the 2 are different, connections are automatically created. Note
that Auto Connect must be selected on the Options Bar.
15 Move the cursor up, and after listing dimensions display, enter 1050 and press Enter to specify the end
point.
The duct riser is drawn down from the AC unit to 2900mm from level 2, and then the duct continues
horizontally for 1050mm.
Notice that a green supply duct riser symbol displays to indicate that a supply duct riser exists.
TIP When zooming or reorienting a view that uses Medium or Fine for Detail Level, you may experience
performance issues depending on the size and complexity of the system geometry. On the View Control Bar,
change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe to improve performance. This allows you to continue to use the
2-line display. You can also specify the Detail Level to Coarse for viewing a single line display.
Notice that only the duct riser displays. This is because the AC unit is beyond the top view range of the 2
- Mech view. You can change the Top view parameter to see the AC unit, but for this exercise you only
need to see the riser. You can also validate the duct riser geometry in the 3D Mech view.
The horizontal primary duct segment needs to be removed as it was an approximate location and it is no
longer needed.
22 In the 2 Mech view, select the horizontal primary segment, and while pressing CTRL, select the adjoining
elbow.
The selected items display in red.
27 Place the cursor over the left edge of the duct riser, and after the mid point snap displays, click to specify
the start point.
31 Spin the 3D Mech view around and zoom as shown to validate the right primary connection.
32 In the 2 - Mech view, pan the view to the right to show the duct riser and the right primary segment.
33 Select the right primary duct, and place the cursor over the end connector.
NOTE When drawing duct either by using Duct draw tool on the Design Bar, or by right-clicking a connector,
you should always verify that the duct type is correct in the Type Selector. However, if you use the Create Similar
tool, , then all connector parameters and the type of the selected object are matched. This eliminates
the need to verify the type in the Type Selector each time you create duct.
37 Place the cursor over the end of the primary, and after the connector snap displays, click and draw the
primary to the left over the wall, and after the centerline snap displays, click to specify the duct segment
end point.
39 Draw the primary to the edge of the AC duct riser, and click to specify the segment end point.
You physically connected the primary duct to the AC unit. However, you still need to check connectivity
to make certain that all duct and duct fittings are connected.
Check connectivity
43 In the 2 - Mech view, place the cursor over the duct riser and press Tab twice.
Add endcaps
47 Place your cursor over the top edge, after the endcap snap aligns to the duct edge and the centerline snap
displays, click to add the endcap.
TIP It is a best practice to zoom in close for accurate endcap placement. The endcap snap aligns with the duct
edge to indicate proper placement.
50 Place the cursor over the end of the primary duct segment and after the endcap snap aligns and the centerline
snaps displays, click to add the endcap.
52 Place the cursor over the primary duct round endcap to verify endcap placement.
53 In the 3D Mech view, use the same method to validate the endcap geometry.
54 Using the 2 views, verify the duct riser endcap, and then validate its geometry.
55 Press Tab to check connectivity.
You physically connected the AC unit to the level 2 VAV boxes by drawing ductwork. Next, you finish the
level 2 supply air system by creating a system to logically connect the level 2 VAV boxes to the AC unit.
56 With the 2 views tiled, click in the 2 - Mech view to make it active, and enter ZF to zoom the view to fit
the window.
57 Place the cursor outside of the building at the upper left corner, drag the cursor to the lower right corner
to draw a pick box around the entire level 2 floor plan.
58 On the Options Bar, click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements.
59 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, and then select Mechanical Equipment, and click OK.
All level 2 VAV boxes are selected. This is because they are the only mechanical equipment on level 2. You
can verify the selected VAV boxes in the 3D Mech view. Remember that when drawing a pick box or using
cross-picking (right to left dragging) all elements visible in the view range of the current view are selected.
In this case, only the level 2 VAV boxes are within the 2 - Mech view range.
60 On the Options Bar, click (Create Supply Air System) to create a supply air system and assign the
selected VAV boxes to it.
61 Click (Select Equipment for System) to assign the AC unit to the system.
62 Click the 3D Mech view title bar to make the window active, and select the level 2 AC unit.
63 Press Esc or click in the drawing area to deactivate the Create Supply Air System tool.
IMPORTANT Although you can draw duct to physically connect system components, all system components
must be logically connected by a system. Remember that systems can be created before or after you draw
ductwork, or even without ductwork. However, ductwork must exist for Revit MEP to perform system calculations
such as airflow and pressure. These calculations are used during duct sizing and can be viewed using the System
Inspector.
IMPORTANT The system components (air terminals and VAV box) that you assigned to a system are organized
in a hierarchy from upstream (parent) to downstream (child). In the Unassigned folder, notice that only level 1
VAV boxes are listed in the Default Supply Air category. This is because you have assigned all level 2 VAV supply
air connectors to the secondary and primary supply air systems. After you assign the level 1 system components
to a primary supply air system, all supply air system components will be assigned and the Default Supply Air
category will be empty.
69 In the System Browser, right-click Mechanical Supply Air 24, and click Inspect.
IMPORTANT Another way to select a system is to select any duct segment, duct fitting, diffuser, or mechanical
equipment that has been assigned to a system. You can then use system tools from the Options Bar. Ductwork
must exist to access the System Inspector. If you select a system component that has been assigned to multiple
systems such as an AC unit or a VAV box, the Select System dialog opens enabling you to select the system to
inspect.
74 Make the 3D Mech view active and continue to inspect the primary supply air system.
75 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Inspector to deactivate the tool.
76 You have completed the level 2 high pressure primary supply air system. Next, you complete the level 1
primary supply air system.
77 Using the methods that you learned in this exercise, complete the level 1 primary supply air system to the
following specifications:
■ In the Roof Mechanical view, draw the supply duct riser using Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows /
Taps and specify a 1700mm width, and a 500mm height.
■ Specify the offset to -4400mm. This offset routes the duct through the level 2 Mechanical/Electrical
room and into the level 1 plenum space terminating at the same level as the level 1 supply air system,
2900mm.
■ Click the supply connector, move the cursor down, and enter 1050mm, and press Enter to specify the
duct end point. Verify the duct riser geometry in the 3D Mech view.
■ Close the Roof Mech view and the 2 - Mech view (if open), open the 1 - Mech view, and tile it to the
left of the 3D Mech view.
■ In the 1 - Mech view, select the left primary horizontal duct segment and elbow, and drag them down
to align with the centerline of the right primary duct. Watch for the centerline snap as shown.
■ Drag the right primary duct connector to the right edge of the AC duct riser, and after the edge
highlights, release the mouse button.
The level 1 primary duct run is connected to the AC unit.
■ In the 1 - Mech view, add an endcap on the end of the duct riser. Use M_Rectangular Duct Endcap :
M_Standard, and remember to zoom the view.
■ Use Tab to check duct connectivity, and validate the duct geometry in the 3D Mech view.
In this exercise, you connected the level 1 and level 2 high pressure primary supply air duct runs to separate rooftop
AC units. Using tiled windows, you drew the AC duct risers and then you physically connected each AC unit to its
respective primary duct run. You then created 2 systems to logically connect the AC units to their VAV boxes, and
validated these logical connections. These systems allow Revit MEP to perform calculations such as flow and pressure
on the primary supply air systems. You have completed the high and low pressure (primary and secondary) supply air
systems for the building. In the next exercise, you check the systems in your project.
1 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Check Duct Systems.
Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (duct) connections of each system throughout
the project. Warnings report that the Default Exhaust Air and Default Return Air systems (for levels 1 and
2) and are not empty. These warnings direct you to check the Unassigned folder in the System Browser. As
you view the warnings, Revit MEP lists the system components that are associated with each warning.
Notice that no warnings refer to the supply air systems indicating that they are valid.
NOTE The Check Duct Systems warnings contain a system type and a description. These warnings can refer to
both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic duct) or logical connection issues (such
as an improperly assigned system) in a system. Remember that after you create ductwork to physically connect
a system, the duct is now associated with that system. The duct geometry is used for system airflow and pressure
calculations, and for duct sizing. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are
checked. Ductwork that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked.
IMPORTANT The most common Check Duct Systems warning is the “default system is not empty” warning.
As you learned when placing air terminals and VAV boxes, all system components must be assigned to a system
immediately after placement. If you place air terminals and VAV boxes without assigning them to a system, Revit
MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. The default system
is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them, thus
assigning the components to a system. After you assign the system components to a system, Revit MEP places
them in their assigned systems folder and removes them from the Unassigned folder. After you have assigned
all system components for the project to their systems, the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Duct
Systems will no longer display “not empty” warnings. Note that a system component may be listed in both its
assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. This occurs because the assigned system component can be
connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors), and you have not assigned the component
to the other systems. For example, you assigned a VAV to a supply air system but the same VAV has a return air
and another supply air connector that you have not assigned to system. In the System Browser, the VAV is listed
in the assigned system and associated with the Default Return Air system in the Unassigned folder.
These Check Duct System warnings refer to different systems that you have yet to design. So, you can click
in the drawing area to close the message window and continue designing other systems. However, as a
tutorial exercise, you open the System Browser to view the unassigned system components in the Unassigned
folder. Then, you confirm that the assigned system components are in their proper systems.
TIP If you have multiple views open, you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between
views, otherwise click Close.
6 Using the same methods, confirm the unassigned system components in the Default Exhaust Air system.
You confirmed all of the unassigned default systems in the Unassigned systems folder. You now confirm
the systems that you created.
7 Collapse the Unassigned folder and expand the Mechanical systems folder.
8 Right-click Supply Air, and click Expand All to view all systems that you created including their assigned
diffusers (air terminals) and mechanical equipment.
Notice that each system contains a system type and an assigned number, such as Mechanical Supply Air
3.
9 Right-click a system, and click Select Press to view it and its assigned system components.
You have validated both the unassigned and the assigned system components and their systems.
In this exercise, you used the Check Duct Systems tool and the System Browser to validate the supply air systems that
you created. You also confirmed that the air terminals and mechanical equipment for the return and exhaust air systems
were unassigned as they were located in their respective default systems in the System Browser and “not empty” warnings
were generated by Check Duct Systems. Depending on your air systems design, you may need to assign these system
components to their proper systems. You have completed the supply air systems for the building. To view the completed
mechanical systems for this tutorial including the supply air system, open the m Completed Mechanical Systems.rvt
file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder under Training Files. In the next lesson, you design a hydronic piping
system for the building.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, right-click 2 -
Mech, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.
A new view called Copy of 2 - Mech is created and becomes the active view.
4 With the 2 - Piping view selected in the Project Browser, click (Properties) to modify the view
properties.
5 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, do the following:
6 In the Visibility Graphics dialog, click the Annotation Categories tab, and under Visibility, clear Grids.
This hides the grid lines to make it easier to place the fin-tube radiators.
7 Click OK.
Next, you change the view range.
8 In the Element Properties dialog, scroll down to the Extents category, and click Edit for View Range.
9 In the View Range dialog, under Primary Range do the following:
■ For Top, verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected, and enter 950mm for Offset.
■ Enter 950 for Cut plane Offset.
■ For Bottom, verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected, and enter -3500mm for Offset.
■ Under View Depth, for Level, verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected, and enter -3500 for
Offset.
This specifies the top view range above the radiators on level 2 and a bottom view range below the return
connection of the boiler on level 1. This allows you locate the boiler and connect to it from one view.
10 Click OK twice.
The 2 - Piping view displays all architectural elements in halftone and it displays the level 1 air systems.
Also notice that 2 - Piping is now located under Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser.
11 You use this view to create the pipe run that services level 2. You can use the level 1 ductwork as a reference
to avoid interference with the level 2 pipe run. However, the pipe run will be located near the outer walls,
and the vertical pipe run from the boiler will be routed in the Mechanical /Electrical room. So the pipe will
not interfere with the duct. Considering this, you can hide the level 1 duct and system components to
make it easier to view the pipe run.
Next you create a series of filters to hide the level 1 duct and system components. You can then use these
filters to hide or show objects in other views.
12 In the 2 - Piping view, click in the drawing area to make the view active, and enter VG.
13 In the Visibility Graphics dialog, click the Filters tab.
On the Filters tab, you can add and activate filters. Notice that some predefined filters are listed under
Name.
14 Click Edit/New.
IMPORTANT You can create and define filters in the Filters dialog. Notice that filters are already created and
listed under Filters. These system filters show or hide certain system elements that share the same system type.
You could use the system filters to filter some duct and duct fittings, however, they will not filter all system
elements needed. So, it will be best to create filters. You can use the system filters for tasks such as color-coding
your systems. In this lesson, the system filters are not used.
■ Select Family Name for Filter by, and verify that equals is selected.
IMPORTANT You can filter by many types of criteria, such as family name, type name, system type, or even a
description that you define. You can create filters that are either general or specific in scope depending on the
filter criteria. Note that if you are filtering multiple categories or multiple types in one category, you must select
filter criteria that is common and shared by all selected components that you want to filter. A quick way to
determine common filter criteria is to draw a pick box around all components in a view, and click on the
Options Bar to view certain components. Then you can view the common filter criteria from the Element Properties
dialog. Note that if at least one type parameter is different amongst the selected components, then no type
parameter will display in the Type Properties dialog. However, common (shared) instance parameters will display
even if other instance parameters are different (the different instance parameters do not display). Depending on
the filter criteria, you may want to select each component type separately.
The new VAV Boxes filter is listed in the Filters list. This filter will hide all parallel fan powered VAVs in
the view after it is added and activated.
Next, you create a filter to hide all 3 types of air terminals. To do this, you need a define common filter
criteria.
NOTE The Description type parameter is applied to all components of that type. This is different from the
Comment instance parameter which only affects the selected component (or instance).
NOTE When entering filter criteria and assigning it to a family, you must spell both verbatim, otherwise the filter
will not work. This is the same rule for using formulae.
31 Under Identity Data, click in the Value column for Description, and select Air Terminal, and click Apply.
Because you already entered the description, you can select it.
32 Repeat the method that you learned to add a description to the return air diffusers.
Remember to click Apply.
33 Click OK twice.
34 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Air Terminal tool.
NOTE If you drew a pick box and filtered to select all air terminals, you will not see the Description type parameter.
This is because the selected supply, return, and exhaust air terminals have at least one different type parameter.
Remember, if differences exist in the selected elements, then the type parameters will not display. By selecting
each air terminal type separately, you can view the Description type parameter and identify it as common to all
air terminal types.
■ Supply Air - Duct Fittings. Category: Duct Fittings; Filter by: System Type, verify that equals is
selected, and enter Supply Air for system type name.
To filter multiple duct fitting types, you need a common filter criteria. All duct fittings in your project
have a System Type instance parameter defined as Supply Air in the element properties. So, you filter
duct fittings by system type.
■ Flex Ducts - Round. Category: Flex Ducts; Filter by: Family Name, verify that equals is selected, and
select Flex Duct Round for the family name.
■ Round Ducts. Category: Ducts; Filter by: Family Name, verify that equals is selected, and select Round
Duct for the family name.
Next, you have 2 types of rectangular duct. You want to view only the rectangular duct with mitered
elbows because this the duct riser which is in the Mechanical /Electrical rooms and you want to avoid
it when routing the pipe from the boiler. So, you specify a family and a type name.
■ Rectangular Ducts Radius Elbows/Taps. Category: Ducts, Filter by: Family Name, verify that
equals is selected, and select Rectangular Duct for the family name; And: Type Name, verify that equals
is selected, and select Radius Elbows / Taps for the type name.
■ Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps. Category: Ducts, Filter by: Family Name, verify that
equals is selected, and select Rectangular Duct for the family name; And: Type Name, verify that equals
is selected, and select Mitered Elbows / Taps for the type name.
Remember that you must click Apply after defining each filter and before defining the next one in order
to create the filter. If you did not click Apply, you need to define the filter again.
39 Click OK.
42 Under Visibility, clear all check boxes except for Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps.
You used this duct to create the duct riser. You will use the duct riser as a reference to avoid interfering
with it when routing the pipe run from the boiler.
43 Click OK.
All filtered components hide from view except for the duct riser in the Mechanical/Electrical room.
TIP Filters allow you hide geometry making visibility clearer. It also improves viewing performance because
geometry that would normally be regenerated is hidden. You can also set the Detail Level to Wireframe to increase
viewing performance.
Next, you create the level 1 piping view in order to place the boiler.
44 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, right-click 1 -
Mech, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.
A new view called Copy of 1 - Mech is created and becomes the active view.
49 In the Visibility Graphics dialog, click the Annotation Categories tab, and under Visibility, clear Grids.
50 Click OK.
You do not need to use filters to place the boiler. Next, you change the view range.
51 In the Element Properties dialog, scroll down to the Extents category, and click Edit for View Range.
52 In the View Range dialog, under Primary Range, verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected and that
3000 is specified for Top Offset.
53 Click OK twice.
The 1 - Piping view displays the new view settings. Unlike the 2 - Piping view, this view only displays ducts
and pipes on its level. The 3000mm top offset prevents the level 2 pipes (except for the boiler pipe
connection), ducts, and fin-tub radiators from displaying. You use this view to place the boiler that services
level 2, and to create the level 1 piping system.
As you create the pipe runs, you will want to validate the geometry. Next, you create the 3D piping view
to be able to validate this geometry.
54 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views, right-click 3D Mech,
and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.
The new view is created using the view properties from the 3D Mech view, such as halftone architecture.
62 Under Visibility, clear all check boxes except for Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps.
You used this duct to create the duct riser. You want to view it to avoid interfering with it when routing
the pipe run from the boiler.
63 Click OK.
64 In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, clear Section Box to turn it off.
65 Click OK.
The duct risers and AC units display in the view. The AC units display because you did not create a filter
to hide them. Notice that the duct fittings are filtered. This is fine because you are using the riser as a
reference to avoid interference with the boiler piping.
In this exercise, you created and modified 2 floor plans and a 3D view. You also created filters to display certain system
components. In the next exercise, you place the radiators and a boiler.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click
2 - Piping to make it the active view.
2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area.
3 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar, click Mechanical Equipment.
NOTE If the Piping tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click Piping.
TIP Although room tags were not copied when you created this view, you can identify a room by placing the
cursor over the room component. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar)
confirm the room name and number.
7 Place the cursor over the top exterior wall, and center a fin-tube radiator under the upper-right window as
shown.
8 Click to place the radiator, and notice that the connectors and temporary dimensions display.
9 Continue placing radiators centered under all windows on level 2 as shown, except for the windows on
the radius wall.
10 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Mechanical Equipment tool.
Next, you modify the radiator flow rate.
11 In the drawing area, right-click a radiator, and click Select All Instances.
All level 2 radiators display in red.
NOTE Note that Select All Instances selects all components of the same type in the entire model. If the same
type of component exists on another level, and you do not want to include it, then it would be better to use
other selection methods such as drawing a pick box.
IMPORTANT If you select multiple objects and then view their properties, the parameters that display are
common to all of the selected objects. If parameters are blank, then these are different across the selected objects.
Your design specification recommends a flow rate of 0.25 L/s for all fin-tube radiators in the building. The
existing radiator flow rate needs to be changed.
15 In the Project Browser, double-click 1 - Piping to make this the active view.
The boiler that services the level 2 radiators will be located on level 1.
17 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar, click Mechanical Equipment, and select M_Boiler : M_Standard from
the Type Selector.
18 Move the cursor to the right of the duct riser, watch the listening dimensions, and click to place the boiler
1200mm from the right vertical wall and 400mm from the horizontal wall in Open 1 as shown.
Notice that the connectors and temporary dimensions display after you place the boiler. You can filter the
air terminals to make it easier to see the dimensions.
20 In the drawing area, right-click the boiler, and click Element Properties.
21 In the Element Properties dialog, under Type Parameters, verify that 14.50 L/s is set for Max Flow.
The boiler maximum flow rate complies with the design specification.
In this exercise, you placed wall mounted fin-tube radiators on level 2, and the boiler that services those radiators on
level 1. You also modified the radiator flow rate and verified the boiler flow rate so that they complied with design
specifications. In the next exercise, you create the systems to logically connect the system components.
IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. Unlike
logical connections (systems), physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. You can create pipes to
connect system components but without a corresponding system, analyses cannot be performed. It is not a pipe system but
only a physical connection.
Dataset
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click
2 - Piping to make it the active view.
2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window.
TIP You can also press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. If the
System Browser does not respond, click in the drawing area to make it active, then press F9.
4 Expand the Unassigned folder, and expand the Default Hydronic Supply and the Default Hydronic Return
systems to view the level 2 radiators and the boiler that you placed in the building.
IMPORTANT In the System Browser, all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according
to the system that you assigned to them. You assign a system component (mechanical equipment, and so on)
to a system either by creating a logical connection (or system) between the system components or by assigning
a system component to an existing system. Notice that all of the mechanical equipment that you added are
located under Default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. This occurred because each system component
must be assigned to a system after it is placed. So, after you placed the radiators and boiler, Revit MEP immediately
assigned them to the Default Hydronic Supply and Default Hydronic Return system category located in the
Unassigned folder. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to their proper system.
As you assign radiators to systems, the assigned radiators move from the Unassigned folder to their respective
assigned system folder. Thus, if all system components are assigned, each Default system category would not
contain any system components and would be considered empty. The System Browser is a powerful tool that
allows you to validate and confirm systems.
Notice that after you click , the hydronic supply system is immediately created and listed in the
System Browser along with the fin-tube radiators that were assigned to it.
7 On the Options Bar, click (Select Equipment for System), and select the boiler to assign it to the
supply system.
Notice that you can select only valid system components, all other components are unavailable.
TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears, place the cursor over a radiator or the
boiler, press Tab, and select the system. You can also right-click the Hydronic Supply 1 listing in the System
Browser, and click Select to select the system.
IMPORTANT The new system named Hydronic Supply 1 is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic
Supply in the Piping folder. The organization is from upstream, the boiler (the parent) to downstream, the radiator
(the child) with the connecting system between them. Notice that the Default Hydronic Supply category no
longer displays. This indicates that you have assigned all hydronic supply system components in the model. Thus,
the Default Hydronic Supply system is empty and does not display.
8 Select a radiator, right-click, and click Select All Instances to select all level 2 radiators.
Remember that the only radiators that exist in the project are on level 2. So, Select All Instances is an
appropriate selection tool.
9 On the Options Bar, click (Create Hydronic Return System) to create the hydronic return system
and assign the selected fin-tube radiators to it.
Notice that is does not display. This is because the selected components already have a hydronic
supply system assigned to them.
10 On the Options Bar, click , and select the boiler to assign it to the return system.
TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area, and cleared from the Options Bar, select one of the
radiators that you added to the system to display this tool and the other Options Bar system tools.
12 In the System Browser, expand Piping, and notice that Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return systems
categories are listed.
13 Right-click each category, and click Expand to view the boilers and the Hydronic Supply 1 and Hydronic
Return 1 system listings.
These listings represent the systems that you just created.
IMPORTANT Although you can draw pipe to create the physical pipe connections, you must create a system
for Revit MEP to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. Remember that systems can be created before
or after pipe, or even without pipe being drawn.
16 Repeat this method to validate the Hydronic Return System logical connection.
17 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save.
18 In the Save As dialog, enter Creating Piping Systems Training for File name, navigate to the folder
of your choice, and click Save.
In this exercise, you created the supply and return piping systems to logically connect the radiators and boiler. You
learned how the System Browser organizes system components and systems, and you used the System Browser to
confirm and validate the newly created systems. Now that you logically connected the piping system components, in
the next exercise, you create the level 2 pipe runs to physically connect the system components.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click
2 - Piping to make it the active view.
2 Place the cursor outside of the building at the upper left corner, drag the cursor to the lower right corner
to draw a pick box around the entire floor plan.
Notice that all components that are in the 2 - Piping view range highlight.
3 On the Options Bar, click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements.
4 In the Filter box, click Check None, and then select Mechanical Equipment, and click OK.
TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering, you can place the cursor over a radiator, press Tab to
highlight the system and select it. Then, you can click Layout Path on the Options Bar.
IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout and the selected system components are
already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors), then the Select a
System dialog will open. You will need to select a system to create the layout. You can select each system in the
dialog to view it.
7 Click OK.
8 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar, verify that Solutions is selected.
9 On the Options Bar, do the following:
NOTE The Perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of
the selected system components. It does not reference the architecture.
NOTE Notice that the Perimeter layout solution inset modifies the layout path. Later in this exercise, you
modify the layout segments that are tangent to the radius wall.
Next, you specify the pipe conversion settings that you use to convert the layout path to a pipe run.
13 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog, select Branch.
14 Under System Type: Hydronic Supply, do the following:
IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the
main, and other obstacles. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes, duct, structural beams, or
architecture.
15 Click OK.
NOTE Configuring the pipe conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them
during your project. You can also configure these settings by clicking Mechanical Settings on the Piping tab of
the Design Bar (or Settings ➤ Mechanical Settings). For more information, refer to Help.
After configuring the pipe conversion settings, you now modify the layout path.
17 In the drawing area, zoom the view, and select the lower layout path main that is tangent to the radius
wall.
18 Using the drag control, drag the main to the right at approximately the same inset as layout path.
20 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Layout.
Ignore the no auto-route solution warning. You will address the cause of this warning later in this exercise.
The supply pipe run (main and branches) is created and all required pipe fittings are automatically inserted.
This pipe run physically connects the supply side (supply connectors) of the system components.
Notice that the pipes are not listed in the System Browser. This is because the System Browser lists system
components and systems. Pipes are a physical not a logical connection, and is not part of the system. For
example, you can delete pipes and pipe fittings and the system remains unaffected.
IMPORTANT Errors may occur while attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or
during sizing. The most common cause of these errors is that the pipe usually has insufficient space to be created,
or offset elevations are incorrect. Either relocate the system components, select a different layout solution, or
manually modify the pipe. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification.
Notice that the pipes and symbolic fittings display in single line. Also notice that a rise/drop symbol displays
indicating the pipe riser. Some pipes are hidden causing a gap. This is caused by the hidden line setting.
IMPORTANT Creating Hydronic Piping Systems uses a hidden (haloed) line display. If a pipe is hidden by an
object, a gap displays indicating the hidden geometry. To turn off hidden lines, click Mechanical Settings on the
Piping tab of the Design Bar (or click Settings menu ➤ Mechanical Settings). In the Mechanical Settings dialog,
select Hidden Line and specify the inside and outside gap to 0. The Hidden Line mechanical setting is not to be
confused with the Hidden Lines Model Graphics Style located on the View Control Bar.
22 On the View Control Bar (located at the lower left of the drawing area), select Fine for Detail Level.
The pipe geometry displays in 2-line enabling you to better see it.
TIP You can easily change the pipe geometry representation by changing the Detail Level. On the View Control
Bar, select Coarse for single line display, Medium for 2-line duct display, or Fine for 2-line pipe display. If you
experience slower viewing performance while using the higher detail settings, change the Model Graphics Style
to Wireframe and/or turn off component visibility in the Visibility Graphics dialog.
Next, you modify the pipe run so that it better fits in with the design. The design requires 2 zones. So, you
will need 2 pipes connecting the boiler to the supply pipe run. A single pipe does not conform to the
hydronic piping design. Instead of moving the pipe, it is easier to delete the pipe and fittings and draw a
new one later. The deletion also divides the pipe run into left and right sides. Additionally, the pipe run
needs to be changed to a 25mm diameter.
24 Zoom in on the pipe connecting the boiler to the supply pipe run.
25 Place the cursor over the pipe, and press TAB twice to highlight the pipe and the adjacent pipe fittings, and
click to select them.
The selected pipe and pipe fittings display in red.
Remember that although the physical connection from the boiler to the radiators has been deleted, the
logical connection (or system) is still intact. Next, you modify the supply pipe run diameter.
29 On the Options Bar, select 25mm for D: (diameter), and click Modify on the Design Bar.
30 Repeat this method to change the right side of the supply pipe run to the same diameter.
NOTE It is important to recognize that changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the Options Bar is
not sizing. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) and sizes the pipe based on a series of
parameters and calculations.
31 Verify the diameter changes by pressing TAB twice to highlight, the pipe run and click to select each side
of the pipe run.
The diameter on the Options Bar displays as 25mm indicating that all pipe for the selected pipe run have
been modified to the specified diameter. If the pipes had different diameters, the diameter would not
display. Next, you check to make certain that the pipe run is physically connected to the radiators.
Check connectivity
32 Right-click in the view and click Zoom to Fit from the context menu.
33 Place the cursor over the right side of the supply pipe run and after it highlights, press Tab 3 times.
All radiators and pipe highlight indicating that they are physically connected.
IMPORTANT When pipes and fittings are connected, you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a
segment of pipe so that it highlights and then press Tab. The first time you press Tab, the branch to which the
pipe is connected highlights. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected pipe and pipe
fittings up to the first piece of connected equipment. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of
connected pipes, fittings, and equipment. If the entire network does not highlight, then you know that a
disconnect exists. This disconnect will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. You can repair the
connection by dragging the pipe segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging
it back again to reconnect, or you may need to convert a fitting and draw pipe. Typically the disconnect results
from not having sufficient room to make the connection.
34 Repeat this method to check the connectivity of the left supply pipe run.
Notice that the lower-left radiator did not highlight or display in red indicating that it is disconnected.
This disconnect caused the no auto-route solution warning message to display after creating the piping
layout. You need to correct the disconnect.
Notice that 2 plus signs and 2 connectors display. These plus signs are fitting conversion controls. Each
control converts the elbow fitting into a tee fittings but with either a vertical or horizontal orientation.
You may need to zoom the view closer to better see the fitting conversion controls.
IMPORTANT Fitting conversion controls display as plus or minus signs that are located near a selected pipe
fitting. These controls convert the selected fitting to the next possible fitting for the piping context. Fitting control
locations indicate the orientation of the fitting connection.
TIP If you place the cursor over a fitting conversion control, a tooltip displays indicating the next possible fitting.
You can now draw the pipe to connect the radiator to the supply pipe run.
41 Zoom out the view to display the disconnected pipe segment and the tee fitting.
45 Move the cursor down toward the tee to begin drawing the pipe, and press Spacebar to match the offset
(-375) and diameter (25mm) to that of the selected tee connector.
TIP When drawing pipe, you can press the Spacebar after you specify your start point and begin drawing. This
automatically specifies the pipe diameter and offset (elevation) to match that of the selected start point object.
If a warning appears informing you that the line is too short, you did not begin drawing before pressing Spacebar
Note that although the diameter and offset are specified automatically, you should always verify the pipe type
in the Type Selector.
46 Continue drawing the pipe segment down toward the tee fitting, and after the connector snap displays,
click to specify the segment end point.
NOTE When drawing pipe, use the connector snap, , to locate a connector and create the connection.
If you do not use the connector snap, a connection may not occur. If you pause briefly, a tooltip appears confirming
the connector. Remember to always check connectivity after drawing the pipe segment.
49 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views, and double-click
3D Piping to make it the active view.
50 On the View Options Bar, specify the Detail Level to Fine to display the pipes in 2-line.
53 Using the methods that you learned to create the supply pipe run, create the level 2 return pipe run
according to the following specifications:
■ In the 2 - Piping view, create a layout for the Hydronic Return 1 system.
■ Select Perimeter solution 3.
■ Enter 600 for Inset.
■ Verify that 0.00° is specified for Slope.
■ For pipe conversion settings, verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected, and enter -525mm for both
the main and branch offsets.
This places the pipes at a 3125mm elevation in the level 1 plenum space.
■ In the Layout Path tool, modify the 2 layout path mains that are tangent to the radius wall to
approximately the same inset as the other sides of the return layout path.
■ Delete the pipe and the 2 fittings that connect the boiler to the return pipe run. The deleted pipe
divides the return pipe run into left and right sides.
■ Change the diameter of each return pipe run side to 25mm. Remember, do not select the radiators
when selecting the return pipe runs.
■ Check connectivity and inspect the corner connections for disconnects.
■ Use the same method to correct any disconnects.
■ Validate the pipe geometry using the 3D Piping view.
In this exercise, you used the Layout Path tool to design the supply and return pipe layouts. You then converted these
layouts to create the supply and return pipe runs that physically connect the radiators. You also modified the pipe runs
so that they were a better fit with the systems design. You checked connectivity, converted fittings, corrected disconnects,
and validated the pipe geometry in the 3D view. In the next exercise, you resolve interference issues with the new pipe
runs.
2 Right-click in the drawing area, click Zoom in Region, and draw a zoom region around the right stairwell.
4 Place the cursor over the left wall of the room that is below the stairwell (Conference Room 31), and click
to specify the section head location.
A new section view named Section 4 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???.
6 Use the drag handles to modify the clip planes so that you capture the pipe run and the stairwell.
8 In the Project Browser, expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section), right-click Section 4, and
click Properties.
9 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select Piping for Sub Discipline, and click OK.
The section relocates under Piping.
11 On the View Control Bar, select Fine for Detail Level, and Shading with Edges for Model Graphics Style.
The geometry displays with shading and outlined edges.
TIP Sections are very useful in visualizing and validating your designs. They offer immediate accessibility to all
floors and areas. You will usually create many sections to both inspect and modify pipe runs, mechanical equipment
placement, and other aspects of your systems design.
13 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 - Piping to make it the active view.
14 Zoom in on the stairwell.
15 Click the return pipe segment that is interfering with the stairs, and after the connectors display, place the
cursor over the top connector.
18 Drag the pipe connector up to the tee fitting, and after the fitting end point snap displays, release the
mouse button to reconnect it.
You drag the pipe segment instead of splitting it because you will convert the vertical tee fitting to a
horizontal tee fitting. If you split the pipe, a small pipe segment will be created that will need to be removed.
Next, you split the supply pipe segment.
22 Place the cursor over the supply pipe run above the stairwell.
23 Watch the listening dimensions, and click to split the pipe at 2160mm from the supply pipe segment
connector above.
You may need to zoom the view to get the correct snap dimensions.
24 With the Split tool open, move the cursor down, and split the supply pipe segment 1400mm from the
bottom pipe segment connector.
Next, you convert a tee fitting, and draw the pipe around the stairs.
Notice that the return pipe is hidden under the supply pipe due to the hidden (haloed) line mechanical
setting.
29 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar, click Pipe to open the Draw tool.
30 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected.
31 Place the cursor over the end of the return tee fitting that you just converted, and after the end point
connector snap displays, click to specify the start point for the first pipe segment.
32 Zoom out the view, and move the cursor to the left, and press Spacebar to automatically specify the pipe
diameter and offset to that of the pipe run.
33 Draw the pipe 4000mm to the left, and click to specify the pipe segment end point and specify the start
point for the second pipe segment.
NOTE When drawing pipe, always make certain that you provide sufficient space for segment and fitting
geometry, especially when connecting to mechanical equipment. Consider that pipe geometry may be larger
and additional fittings may be inserted after performing sizing.
35 Draw the pipe to the return pipe run on the right, and after the connector snap displays, click to specify
the segment end point.
This activates the Draw tool, and automatically matches the pipe diameter and offset of the selected pipe.
NOTE If you right-click a connector and click Draw Pipe on the context menu, the pipe diameter, or width and
height, and offset automatically match that of the selected connector. However, you should always verify the
pipe type in the Type Selector.
40 Using the pipe drawing methods that you learned, draw the supply pipe run around the stairs as shown.
IMPORTANT Using the Move tool is a 2-click process. First, specify the reference or start point of the object
that you want to move. Second, specify the move destination or end point.
44 Place the cursor over the pipe segment and after the centerline snap displays, click to specify the move
start point.
Notice that the adjacent pipe segments and fittings parametrically adjust to the move but the rest of the
pipe run and the radiators remain unchanged.
46 Place the cursor over each pipe run and press TAB twice to check connectivity.
Each pipe run and their respective tee fittings highlight indicating that they are physically connected.
The interference has been resolved. Next, you confirm and resolve pipe interference with the left staircase.
48 Drag Section 1 to the left of the stairwell, and adjust the view clip planes as shown.
Although this section was used for air systems, you reuse it to confirm pipe interference with the stairs
instead of creating a new section.
NOTE If you use a section view to check pipe interference, you must adjust the section view clip planes to capture
only the stairs and not the pipes beyond the stairs. Otherwise, you may get a false positive result.
49 Press ESC, and double-click the section head to open the section view.
50 On the View Control Bar, select Fine for Detail Level.
51 Zoom in on the staircase and notice that the pipes do interfere with the stairs.
52 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 - Piping to make it the active view.
53 Zoom in on the stairwell.
58 Again, using the methods that you learned, draw the supply and return pipe segments as shown.
Remember to watch for connector snaps.
IMPORTANT You have learned 3 different methods to create pipe using the Draw tool. You can click Pipe from
the Design Bar and press Spacebar to match the diameter (or width and height), and offset elevation to that of
the selected pipe connector. You can right-click a connector and click Draw Pipe from the context menu. You
can also drag a pipe connector to modify a segment. Using these 2 methods, the start point, diameter (or width
and height), and offset are automatically specified. Another method to create pipe is to select the pipe to create,
and click (Create Similar) on the Edit toolbar. Using Create Similar, the pipe type is also matched.
Remember that after you create pipe, always: (1) Provide sufficient space for segment and fitting geometry, (2)
Connect to a snap, preferably a connector snap, (3) Verify the pipe type in the Type Selector (not necessary with
Create Similar), and (4) Check connectivity after making a connection.
In this exercise, you used section views to confirm pipe interference with the stairs. Then, you used the Split, Draw,
and Move tools to modify the pipes that interfered with the stairs, and rerouted pipes to resolve the interference. In
the next exercise, you connect the boiler to the pipe runs.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views, and double-click
3D Piping to make it the active view.
2 With the 3D Piping view active, click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows.
3 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click
2 - Piping to make it the active view.
4 Enter WT to tile both windows.
TIP When tiling 2 views, the active view is tiled to the left.
5 Adjust the view in both windows to view the boiler and the pipe runs as shown.
You will design in the 2 - Piping view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D Piping view. You are ready
to connect the boiler to the supply and return pipe runs.
6 Zoom in on the split supply and return pipe runs located above the boiler.
Remember that these pipe runs split as a result of deleting the pipe that connected the boiler to the pipe
runs.
7 Click each pipe segment and drag the connectors to adjust the pipe segments to provide ample space to
connected the boiler connector pipes as shown.
12 Draw the pipe to the left, and press Spacebar to match the pipe diameter and the offset elevation to that of
the boiler connector.
Notice that the boiler connector offset is at -2176.8mm. This negative offset is based on level 2 because
you are designing in the level 2 view.
14 Move the cursor to the left, watch the listening dimensions, and click to specify the pipe segment end
point at 460mm from the boiler connection.
TIP If the exact dimension snap increment does not display, zoom the view and try again. You can also add a
dimension snap increment in the Snaps dialog (click Settings menu ➤ Snaps). Remember to always use a
semi-colon (;) to separate snap increments.
15 Draw the pipe up to 900mm, and click to specify the end point.
In a later exercise, you will place a circulator pump on this pipe segment.
TIP When drawing pipe, after listening dimensions display, you can enter a dimension and press Enter instead
of drawing to the preferred dimension.
TIP After entering a value in Options Bar, you may need to press TAB to make the drawing area active.
17 Draw the pipe segment straight up toward the supply pipe run, and after the centerline and intersection
snaps display, click to specify the pipe segment end point.
22 Place the cursor over the boiler connector pipe and press Tab.
The connector pipe and the left supply pipe run segment highlight indicating that they are physically
connected.
24 With the windows tiled, click in the 3D Piping view to make it active.
25 Zoom in on the elbow fitting above the boiler, and click it.
26 Using the fitting conversion method that you learned, convert the elbow to a tee fitting with a horizontal
orientation.
29 Zoom in on the tee, right-click the right connector, and click Draw Pipe from the context menu.
32 Draw the pipe 600mm to the right and click to specify the segment end point.
33 Draw the pipe up, and after listening dimensions display, enter 900 and press Enter.
This creates a 900mm pipe segment. In a later exercise, you will place a circulator pump on this segment.
38 Check connectivity.
40 With the windows tiled, and the 2 - Piping the active view, zoom in on the boiler.
41 Select the boiler, and right-click the return connector, and click Draw Pipe.
44 Move the cursor up, and enter 150 and press Enter.
45 On the Options Bar, enter -525 for Offset.
This places the next pipe segment at an elevation of 3125mm from level 1.
46 Draw the pipe up from the boiler 600mm, and click to specify the end point.
IMPORTANT Auto Connect allows you to connect an object that you are drawing to an object that is located
on a different level or plane. If Auto Connect is selected and your selection point overlaps an object on a different
level or plane, an automatic connection is made. If Auto Connect is not selected, the connection is not made.
Auto Connect is available on the Options Bar only when the Draw tool is active.
48 Draw a pipe segment to the left and under the supply pipe, and after the intersection and centerline snaps
display, click to specify the end point.
51 Select the return pipe segment, and right-click the top connector, and click Draw Pipe.
52 On the Options Bar, clear Auto Connect.
53 Again, draw the pipe to the left and under the supply pipe, and after the intersection and centerline snaps
display, click to specify the end point.
In the floor plan view, notice that part of the return pipe is hidden as it passes under the supply pipe. This
is caused by the hidden (haloed) line mechanical setting.
IMPORTANT Creating Hydronic Piping Systems uses a hidden (haloed) line display. If a pipe is hidden by an
object, a gap displays indicating the hidden geometry. To turn off hidden lines, click Mechanical Settings on the
Piping tab of the Design Bar (or click Settings menu ➤ Mechanical Settings). In the Mechanical Settings dialog,
select Hidden Line, and specify the inside and outside gap to 0. The Hidden Line mechanical setting is not to be
confused with the Hidden Lines Model Graphics Style located on the View Control Bar.
TIP When drawing pipe, press ESC to deactivate the tool. On an open pipe segment or run, press it once to stop
drawing the current object, and twice to deactivate the Draw tool. If the pipe segment or run is closed, press
ESC once to deactivate the Draw tool.
You now have a better understanding of the Auto Connect. Next, you finish connecting the boiler to both
return pipe runs.
55 Select the return pipe segment, right-click the left connector and click Draw Pipe.
56 Draw the pipe to the left, and after pipe segment aligns with end of the left return pipe run located above,
click the specify the end point.
The boiler is connected to the left side of the return pipe run.
63 Draw the pipe toward the return pipe run, and after the intersection and centerline snaps display, click to
specify the end point.
The boiler is connected to the right side of the return pipe run. Remember that hidden lines display when
the pipe display is obstructed.
66 Place the cursor over the return pipe before the tee fitting, and press TAB 3 times to check connectivity for
both sides of the return pipe.
The return pipes highlight indicating that they are physically connected.
Next, you create a section view to verify the clearance between the return pipe riser and the boiler.
68 Using the section view creation method that you learned, draw a section view, and adjust the view as
shown.
73 On the View Control Bar, click Fine for Detail Level, and click Shading with Edges for Model Graphics
Style.
74 Zoom on the boiler return pipe to validate the pipe geometry and check the clearance between the pipe
riser and the boiler.
76 With the 2 - Piping and the 3D Piping views tiled, in the 2 - Piping view, zoom in on the boiler and supply
and return connector pipes.
IMPORTANT Using the Align tool is a 2-click process. First, select the reference point where you want to align,
and then you select the point to align.
78 Place the cursor over the left supply pipe, and after highlights, click to specify the alignment reference
point.
79 Move the cursor over the left return pipe, and after the centerline highlights, click to specify the point to
align.
80 Using the alignment method you just learned, align the right return pipe with the right supply pipe.
82 Place the cursor below the tee fitting, and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity.
In this exercise, connected the boiler to the supply and return pipe runs. You used the Split tool to create 2 separate
supply and return pipe runs. You then drew pipes that had different offset elevations to connect the boiler to the supply
and return pipe runs. You worked in 2 tiled views enabling you to design and validate geometry simultaneously. It also
allowed you to better understand the Auto Connect behavior. Finally, you used the Align tool to align the return pipes
to the supply pipes. In the next exercise, you size the supply and return piping runs.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click
2 - Piping to make it the active view.
2 Place the cursor over the boiler, and after it highlights, press Tab 4 times to highlight both the supply and
return pipe runs including the radiators and the boiler, and click to select them.
IMPORTANT Remember that the Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. It does not
report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run.
■ Click OK.
IMPORTANT Errors may occur while attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or
during sizing. The most common cause of these errors is that the pipe usually has insufficient space to be created.
Either relocate the system components, select a different layout solution, or manually modify the pipe. Remember
to always check pipe connectivity after modification.
6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views, and double-click
3D Piping to make it the active view.
7 Validate the sized pipe geometry.
In this exercise, you sized the supply and return pipe runs using both the Friction and Velocity sizing methods. You
also specified branch sizing that was different than the main pipe sizing. In the next exercise, you place the circulator
pumps for the supply pipe runs.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views, and double-click
3D Piping to make it the active view.
2 With the 3D Piping view active, click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows.
This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session. Note that if this
option is unavailable, the active view is the only open window.
3 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click
2 - Piping to make it the active view.
4 Enter WT to tile both windows.
TIP When tiling 2 views, the active view is tiled to the left.
5 Adjust the view in both windows to view the boiler and connecting pipes as shown.
You place the pumps in the 2 - Piping view and validate the geometry and rotate the pumps in the 3D
Piping view.
6 In the 2 - Piping view, zoom in on the boiler and the 2 supply pipes to the left and right of the boiler.
20 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, enter -1500 for Offset.
This is the offset elevation of the horizontal pipe on which you are placing the pump.
TIP To quickly view the pipe offset value, click the pipe segment. The offset appears on the Options Bar and in
the drawing area. You can also open the Element Properties dialog to view the offset.
21 Click OK.
The circulator pump is placed at the same offset as the horizontal pipe segment.
If the pump remains selected, click in the drawing area to clear the selection. Next, you connect the pump.
TIP Sometimes a selected object remains selected (displays in red) after an action upon it has finished. To clear
the selection, you can click in the drawing area, click Modify on the Design Bar, or press ESC.
22 In the 2 - Piping view, click the upper pipe segment to display the connectors.
23 Drag the pipe connector down toward the pump, and after the connector snap displays, release the mouse
button to connect the pipe to the pump.
27 Using the methods that you just learned, connect the circulator pump the services the right side of the
supply pipe, and check connectivity.
Make certain that you align the right pump to the left.
Next, you rotate the pumps so that the motor is located as the top.
28 With the 2 - Piping and the 3D Piping views tiled, click in the 3D Piping view to make it active.
29 Adjust the view so that both circulator pumps are in the view.
32 Using the method that you just learned, rotate the right pump so that motor is at the top.
Notice that the 2 circulator pumps are in the Unassigned folder. As you learned in previous exercises, you
must assign all system components (mechanical equipment, and so on) that you placed to a system.
Immediately after placement, Revit MEP associates the unassigned components with a default system in
order to perform calculations. These unassigned components are located in the Unassigned folder in the
System Browser. After you assign the components to a system, they move to their respective system folder.
You need to assign the 2 circulator pumps to the hydronic supply system.
NOTE Do not click . You use this tool to add mechanical equipment that is located upstream in a
system, such as VAV boxes, boilers and AC units. If you use this tool, the boiler will be considered unassigned
and it will move to the Unassigned folder.
37 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar, click Add To System.
System components that were not assigned for this system are grayed out. Notice that the cursor changes
to indicate that Add To System is active.
38 Click the left and right circulator pumps to add them to the supply hydronic system.
Notice that the pumps moved from the Unassigned folder in the System Browser to the Hydronic Supply
1 system listing in the Piping folder. This indicates that the pumps have been assigned to the supply
hydronic system. They are now logically connected to the boiler and radiators.
39 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar, click Finish System.
40 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save.
41 In the Save As dialog, enter Placing Circulator Pumps Training for File name, navigate to the folder
of your choice, and click Save.
In this exercise, you used tiled floor plan and 3D views to place 2 in-line circulator pumps for the hydronic supply
piping system. You used the Split tool to open the pipe segments to accommodate the pumps and then you connected
the pumps. You rotated the pumps in 2 different ways by pressing the Spacebar, and by clicking the rotation controls.
Finally, you assigned the circulator pumps to the supply hydronic system and confirmed the assignments in the System
Browser. In the next exercise, you inspect the hydronic piping systems for flow and pressure.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click
2 - Piping to make it the active view.
2 Right-click in the view, click Zoom in Region from the context menu.
3 Draw a zoom on the boiler in the Mechanical/Electrical room.
You will inspect the hydronic supply system.
NOTE To select a system, select any pipe segment, fitting, mechanical equipment, and so on that you have
assigned to a system. System tools display on the Options Bar.
IMPORTANT If you select a system component that has been assigned to multiple systems such as a boiler, the
Select System dialog opens enabling you to select the system to inspect. You can click a system in the dialog
and the system highlights in red enabling you to preview it.
NOTE You can also use System Inspector from within the System Browser. Right-click a system from the System
Browser, and click Inspect from the context menu. After the System Inspector activates, click Inspect from the
System Inspector tab on the Design Bar.
8 Place the cursor over the boiler to inspect system information pertaining to the boiler.
The boiler highlights and an inspection flag dynamically reports the section number, flow, and pressure
information including pressure loss. A tooltip also displays this system information. Arrows display on the
pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system.
As you inspect, notice that the assigned system components highlight and can be inspected but you cannot
inspect system components that have not been assigned to the selected system.
Next, you inspect 2 areas of the selected piping system to compare system information.
9 Place the cursor over the left pipe segment above the pump, and click to temporarily place the inspection
flag on the segment.
10 Move the cursor over the right pipe segment above the pump to compare the flow and pressure information
with that of the left pipe segment.
14 With the System Inspector activated and the Hydronic Supply 1 system selected, double-click the 3D Piping
view, and inspect a fin-tube radiator.
Continue to use this method to inspect and compare inspection information for system components and
pipe across the selected Hydronic Supply 1 system. Remember that you can switch between the floor plan
and 3D views without closing the System Inspector.
15 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Inspector to deactivate the System Inspector.
16 Using the methods that you learned, use the System Inspector and inspect the return piping systems in
the project.
NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe, the selected system components
and pipe must be logically and physically connected. The pipe and the system components must be connected
to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection).
In this exercise, you used the System Inspector to inspect the flow direction, flow, and pressure information for the
hydronic supply system in the project. You noticed that flow and pressure information is specific to the selected system
component, and that all system information is color-coded for either the main or the branch. You also compared system
information across a system. In the next exercise, you check the piping systems.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, double-click the
2 - Piping to make it the active view.
2 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar, click Check Pipe Systems.
Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system
throughout the project. A message appears indicating the no warning were found. The piping system is
logically and physically valid.
However, check system warnings may occur. As a tutorial exercise, you check the air systems to view check
systems warnings.
NOTE If the Piping tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click Piping.
3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Check Duct Systems.
Warnings display. Notice that these warnings indicate that the default systems are “not empty.”
4 NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. These warnings can refer to both
physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an
improperly assigned system). Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system, the pipe is
now associated with that system. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations, and for pipe
sizing. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. Pipe that is associated
with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked.
IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is the “default system is not empty” warning. As you
learned when placing fin-tube radiators, all system components must be assigned to a system immediately after
placement. If you place radiators without assigning them to a system, Revit MEP creates a default system and
assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder
until you select the system components and create a system for them, thus assigning the components to a system.
After you assign the system components to a system, Revit MEP places them in their assigned systems folder and
removes them from the Unassigned folder. After you have assigned all system components for the project to
their systems, the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display “not empty”
warnings. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder.
This occurs because the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different
system connectors), and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. For example, you
assigned a fin-tube radiator to a supply hydronic system but the same radiator has a return system connector
that you have not assigned to a system. In the System Browser, the fin-tube radiator is listed in the assigned
system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Return system in the Unassigned folder.
Next, you open the System Browser to view the unassigned air system components and the associated
default air systems. Then, you confirm the validity of the assigned piping system components and systems.
Next, you confirm the system component assignments.
TIP You can press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. If the System
Browser does not respond, click in the drawing area to make it active, then press F9.
6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, double-click 2 -
Mech to make it the active view.
7 Expand the Unassigned folder and notice that both Default Return Air and Default Exhaust Air systems
are listed.
8 Expand Default Return Air and notice the air terminals and mechanical equipment that were automatically
assigned to the Default Return Air system.
9 Right-click Default Return Air, and click Show to view all of the unassigned system components.
The red lines represent the default logical connection.
TIP If you have multiple views open, you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between
views, otherwise, click Close.
10 Using the same methods, confirm the unassigned system components in the Default Exhaust Air system.
Now that you confirmed all of the unassigned component for the default air systems, you confirm the
piping system assignments.
11 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 - Piping to make it the active view.
12 In the System Browser, collapse the Unassigned folder and expand the Piping folder.
13 Right-click Hydronic Supply, and click Expand All.
The supply system that you created, Hydronic Supply 1 is listed along with the boiler, fin-tube radiators
and the circulator pumps that you assigned to this system. Notice that the system contains a system type
and an assigned number.
15 Using the methods that you learned, confirm the system and the system assignments for the hydronic
return system.
You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems.
In this exercise, you used the Check Pipe Systems tool and the System Browser to validate the level 2 supply and return
hydronic piping systems that you created. You also confirmed that the air terminals and mechanical equipment for
the return and exhaust air systems were unassigned as they were located in their respective default systems in the
System Browser and “not empty” warnings were generated by Check Duct Systems. Depending on your air systems
design, you may need to assign these system components to their proper systems. The piping system that you designed
did not return any check system warnings; it is a valid system without problems. You have completed the level 2 piping
systems for the building. To view the completed mechanical systems for the tutorial including the level 2 hydronic
piping system, open the m Completed Mechanical Systems.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder under
Training Files.
For additional practice, use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 hydronic piping system. Design the
system in the 1 - Piping view and filter the visibility of objects as needed. Use the same piping system components that
you used for level 2. For pipe offset, specify 2975mm for the supply and 2825mm for the return pipe offset elevation.
In the lesson, you created a hydronic piping system consisting of a supply and return pipe runs, circulator pumps, a
boiler, and fin-tube radiators. You validated rigid pipe connections and geometry using floor plan, 3D, and section
views. You inspected the logical systems using System Inspector and the System Browser. Finally, you checked the
logical and physical connections for the system using Check Pipe Systems. This completes the Designing Piping Systems
lesson.
In this tutorial, you created a supply air system and a hydronic piping system, Each was a completely different mechanical
system that consisted of different system components however, the creation and modification methods remained the
same. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical duct or pipe connections and creating logical
systems. The completed mechanical systems are included in the m Completed Mechanical Systems.rvt file located in
the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder under Training Files. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new mechanical
systems. Explore different system designs, parametrically modify those designs, and see the results dynamically in views
and design documents. This is the power BIM (Building Information Modeling). This is the future of systems
designing—Revit MEP 2008.
model of a building project. The building contains a variety of spaces where you
will design lighting and power systems. The first lesson consists of exercises that
prepare your project for the types of systems that you will design in the following
lesson.
The datasets that you use to complete these exercises are located in the Training
Files directory. You can search the Training Files ➤ Metric directory to verify that
the datasets have been downloaded. If the tutorial datasets are not present, go to
NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially; each
exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. After finishing each
exercise, you can choose to save your work. However, it is highly recommended that
you always begin an exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides. This
dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training
session.
213
Planning Electrical Systems
In this lesson you specify electrical settings, load the families containing the electrical components that will make up
your electrical system, and prepare the electrical views that you will need to design the electrical system for your project.
■ Power plans where you will place electrical devices and equipment and design power circuits.
■ Electrical Ceiling Plans where you will place lighting fixtures.
■ Lighting Plans where you will design lighting circuits.
Revit MEP provides families of common electrical components that you place in your power and lighting plans. You
load the families that comprise the specific components that will be used in your electrical system. As you develop
more advanced skills working with Revit MEP, you can customize components and expand the library of electrical
families.
All of Revit MEP’s electrical (and mechanical) components are designed with connectors. Connectors allow Revit MEP
to maintain information about the systems that you create, and make it possible for Revit MEP to perform calculations
to assist you with your design. It is important that the connectors associated with components that you place in a view
are within the View Range or level offset. For example, the connectors for the ceiling-hosted lighting fixtures that you
will place in rooms are above the ceiling level. For this reason, the Limit Offset, in the Element Properties dialog for
Rooms, has been set to 2300 mm for the building used with these exercises. This allows the illuminance of the lighting
fixtures to be considered when calculating required lighting levels.
Dataset:
Parameter Value
Name CU-THWN
Material Copper
Temperature Rating 75
Insulation THWN
NOTE Revit MEP does not prevent specifying unfeasible voltage values. For example, you could specify a
distribution system with a L-L Voltage value of 120 and an L-G Voltage value of 480, even though this is physically
impossible.
Distribution systems can be deleted only if they are not currently assigned to any devices.
NOTE Although it is possible to specify a distribution system with a Configuration value of Delta and a Wire
value of 4, this type of system (High, Red, or Wild leg) is currently not supported in Revit MEP because there is
no way to specify the high leg voltage.
You can Split the default range to create several load ranges for a particular system and apply a different
demand factor to each range. For example, you can specify the following parameters for a building lighting
system:
3,000VA 100%
10,000VA 30%
The settings in this example apply a 100% demand factor to loads less than 3000VA, a 50% demand factor
to loads between 3000VA and 10,000VA, and a 30% demand factor for loads greater than 10,000VA.
For this exercise, leave the default settings as shown here.
10 Click OK.
11 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Architectural ➤ New Construction ➤ Floor Plans,
right-click Level 1, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.
A new view called Copy of Level 1 is created.
■ 2-Power
■ 2-Lighting
Ceiling grid patterns (only visible in ceiling plans) let you correctly lay out lighting fixtures. In the following steps you
will create a ceiling plan for each level by copying and renaming the ceiling plans that the architect has already created.
15 In the Project Browser, expand Ceiling Plans, right-click Level 1, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate
with Detailing.
16 Right-click Copy of Level 1, and click Rename.
17 In the Rename View dialog, enter 1-Ceiling Elec for Name, and click OK.
18 Repeat the previous 3 steps to create a 2-Ceiling Elec ceiling plan.
Now that you have created views specifically for electrical information, you need to apply settings, which are available
from view templates.
View templates let you easily control view properties. The Power Plan, Lighting Plan, and Electrical Ceiling templates
that you will apply to your new views control the visibility of component categories, the view discipline, and the view
range.
Each of the templates that you will apply to your new views specify Electrical for the view discipline, which places the
view under the Electrical branch in the project browser, and causes the architectural components to be dimmed in the
view. The templates also specify the sub-discipline for each view, which further defines their position in the project
browser.
19 In the Project Browser, right-click 1-Lighting, and click Apply View Template.
20 In the Select View Template dialog, click Lighting Plan, and click OK.
TIP The Select View Template dialog can also be accessed from the View menu.
The 1-Lighting view is placed under a newly created Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans branch in the project browser.
21 In the Project Browser, right-click 1-Power, and click Apply View Template.
22 In the Select View Template dialog, select Power Plan from the list of templates, and click OK.
The 1-Power view is placed under a newly created Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans branch in the project browser.
23 In the Project Browser, right-click 1-Ceiling Elec, and click Apply View Template.
24 In the Select View Template dialog, select Electrical Ceiling from the list of templates, and click OK.
The 1-Ceiling Elec view is placed under a newly created Electrical ➤ Ceiling ➤ Ceiling Plans branch in the project
browser.
25 Using the same method, apply the Lighting Plan template to the 2-Lighting view, apply the Power Plan
template to 2-Power, and apply the Electrical Ceiling Plan template to the 2-Ceiling Elec view.
■ M_Lighting Switches.rfa
■ M_Receptacle.rfa
29 Click Open.
30 In the Project Browser, expand Families.
31 Using the same method, reopen the Electrical folder, and load the following electrical families from the
Equipment folder:
32 Open the Electrical folder again and load the M_Troffer Corner Insert.rfa electrical family from the Lighting
Fixtures folder.
As you loaded each of the component families, they were added to the Families in the Project Browser.
33 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
34 Click File menu ➤ Close.
35 Proceed to the next exercise, “Defining Required Lighting Levels” on page 219.
In this exercise, you prepared views specifically for your power and lighting plans, selected components for your
electrical systems, and established the parameters for your wiring, voltages, distribution systems, and demand factors.
Before you can specify a lighting requirement for the rooms within your project, you must first create a parameter that
will hold the value for the lighting requirement.
4 Click OK twice.
The new Required Lighting Level parameter is added to the list in the Project Parameters dialog and is now
an instance parameter for Rooms under Electrical-Lighting in the Room Element Properties dialog.
The new parameter you have just created applies to all rooms in the project. To verify this, you can look
at the properties for one of the rooms.
8 Click Cancel.
■ Click OK.
NOTE Schedules can be used as a design interface (Key schedule) as well as a documentation tool (Schedule
building components). You determine the type of schedule by clicking Schedule building components or Schedule
keys in the New Schedule dialog when creating a new Schedule/Quantities view.
11 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, select Required Lighting Level from the Available fields
list, and click Add to add this field to the Scheduled fields (in order) list.
12 Click OK.
The key schedule displays in the drawing area.
14 On the Options Bar, click New 7 times to add 7 rows in the key schedule, one for each type of room in the
building.
The new rows are added with 1 through 7 as the default Key Names.
Enter a room type in the Key Name column and a corresponding lighting level in the Required Lighting
Level column for the different types of rooms in the project, according to the values in the following table:
Lounge 270
Restroom 325
Conference 375
Mech/Elec 215
Stair/Circulation 215
15 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Architectural ➤ New Construction ➤ Floor Plans,
double-click the Level 1 floor plan to make it the active view.
NOTE Generally, the Level 1 floor plan would be thought of as the architect’s view. In a worksharing environment,
this view might well be part of a workset checked out by the architect, and other users would not be able to
perform operations covered in this exercise. For tutorial purposes, assume you would have full access to this
view.
16 Zoom in on the large open area in the center of the floor plan.
17 Move the cursor over the room until a cross-hair displays, then right-click, and click Element Properties.
18 In the Element Properties dialog, under Instance Parameters, scroll down to the Identity Data category,
and for Lighting Level parameter, click , and select Open Office.
19 Scroll up to the Electrical - Lighting category, and notice that the value for Required Lighting Level is now
540 lx, the value that you entered for this room type in the key schedule. The value is grayed out and
cannot be edited because you associated this parameter with the Key Name specified by the Room Lighting
Requirements key schedule.
20 Click OK.
21 Using the same method, continue applying Lighting Level keys to the remaining rooms in the project
according to the following table:
TIP You can select multiple rooms of the same type and set the Lighting Level parameter from the same Element
Properties dialog. While pressing Ctrl, select multiple rooms of the same type (for example, Office), then right-click
one of the selections, and click Element Properties to open the Element Properties for the selected rooms.
22 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
23 Click File menu ➤ Close.
24 Proceed to the next exercise, “Assigning Room Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels” on page
223.
In this exercise you created a new project parameter and used it in a key schedule to specify a parameter value (Required
Lighting Level) for the rooms in your project. You can use a key schedule to specify more than one parameter for a
component, if required. For example, you could create a key schedule named Room Variables, and select both Required
Lighting Level and Temperature as parameters. Now the key schedule will have one column for Required Lighting Level
and another for Temperature where you can specify values according to room type. Consequently, selecting a room
type for your new Room Variables parameter in a room’s Element Properties dialog will specify values for both parameters
according to the key schedule.
3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog, select Rooms for Category, and click (Duplicate).
4 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Required Lighting, and click OK.
5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog, for Title, enter Required Lighting Levels.
6 For Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK to dismiss the alert message.
7 Click OK.
8 On the Drafting tab on the Design Bar, click Color Scheme Legend, and place it in the drawing.
9 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog, select Required Lighting , and click OK.
10 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog, for the Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK.
11 Right-click the color scheme legend, and click Element Properties.
12 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
13 In the Type Properties dialog, specify the following Type Parameters:
14 Click OK twice.
15 Drag the color scheme legend preview to the lower-left corner of the plan.
The color scheme for the Level 1 floor plan should now look something like the image below.
18 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
19 Click File menu ➤ Close.
20 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels” on page 225.
Color fill plans can be useful as design documents and as communication documents to show other team members
design intent while the project is in the design phases. Color fills can be applied for any parameter that already exists
for rooms, or for any parameter that you want to create for a room (such as the Required Lighting Level parameter you
created in the previous exercise).
3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, scroll down the Available fields list, double-click the
following fields to add them to the Scheduled fields (in order) list:
■ Number
■ Name
■ Required Lighting Level
■ Average Estimated Illumination
■ Ceiling Reflectance
■ Wall Reflectance
■ Floor Reflectance
■ Lighting Calculation Workplane
6 Click OK.
The Lighting Delta parameter is added to the Scheduled fields list.
16 Click OK.
17 Using the same method, specify rounding to 2 decimal places for the Wall Reflectance and Floor Reflectance
fields.
18 Click OK.
19 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
20 Click File menu ➤ Close.
21 Proceed to the next lesson, “Designing the Electrical System” on page 228.
The schedule that you have just created shows the Average Estimated Illumination level for all of the rooms as 0. This
is because you have not yet added lighting fixtures to any of the rooms. You can also see that the Lighting Delta has
been calculated for each room, and in every case the Lighting Delta field is red. This is because the value is not within
the range that you specified in the Conditional Formatting dialog.
In this exercise, you created a schedule that you will refer to as you add lighting fixtures to the project. The schedule
will be used to check the actual design against the design requirements that were specified in a previous exercise. This
type of schedule can be useful as a method for checking design components in the project.
NOTE Right-click a heading, and click Unhide All Columns to restore the hidden columns.
7 On the Windows menu, click Tile, and arrange the windows as shown.
NOTE A preview of the lighting fixture is not displayed until you move the cursor over a ceiling. You cannot
place this type of lighting fixture in a non-ceiling location.
11 With the cursor in the room in the upper-left corner of the plan, click to place the lighting fixture in the
ceiling as shown.
It is not necessary to align the lighting fixture to the grid in this step. In the next step you will use the
Move command to snap the fixture to a ceiling grid intersection.
12 Click Modify.
13 Zoom in on the lighting fixture, select it, and on the Toolbar, click (Move).
14 Move the cursor over the lower-left corner of the lighting fixture, and when Endpoint displays, click to
specify the start point.
In the Room Lighting Analysis Schedule, the Lighting Delta for room 3 is changed from -325 lx to -118 lx,
closer to the required +/- 55 lx.
The current line weight settings for the lighting fixture and ceiling grid make it difficult to distinguish the
outline of the lighting fixture from the ceiling grid lines. Adjusting the line weight for the lighting fixtures
will make it easier to place the remaining lighting fixtures.
23 Select the lower-left Endpoint of the lighting fixture as the start point, and then select ceiling grid
intersections as the destination move endpoints to place 5 copies of this fixture in the 3 offices in the upper
left area of the level 1, as shown.
Check the illumination levels against the Room Lighting Analysis schedule
24 Check the Average Estimated Illumination and Lighting Delta in the Room Lighting Analysis schedule.
To adjust the illumination level downward, you decide to replace one of the 3-lamp fixtures in each room
with a 2-lamp fixture.
NOTE Average Estimated Illumination levels are calculated using the lumen method for lighting calculations.
Point by point analysis is not currently supported.
25 In the 1-Ceiling Elec, select one of the lighting fixtures in each room, and in the Type Selector, select
M_Troffer Corner Insert : M_600x1200 2Lamp.
TIP You can select multiple components by pressing Ctrl while selecting components in a drawing. If you select
a component inadvertently, press Shift while clicking the component to remove it as a selection.
26 Again, check the Average Estimated Illumination and Lighting Delta in the Room Lighting Analysis schedule,
and verify that the lighting levels are now within the specified range.
You can perform the following steps to complete this exercise, placing lighting fixtures in the remaining Level 1 and
Level 2 spaces or you can close this dataset, and go on to the next exercise. The lighting fixtures are all placed in the
next dataset.
27 Using the same method, continue placing 2-lamp and 3-lamp lighting fixtures in the remaining spaces in
the 1-Ceiling Elec and 2-Ceiling Elec views. Use the Room Lighting Analysis schedule to determine when
the lighting levels are within the specified range.
When you are finished, only the Mechanical/Electrical rooms (without ceilings) will have a red background
in the Room Lighting Analysis schedule. Completed lighting layouts for Level 1 and Level 2 are shown
below along with the Room Lighting Analysis schedule.
NOTE Ceiling grids were not added to the Mechanical/Electrical rooms; therefore, you cannot add lighting
fixtures to these rooms.
Level 2
With the exception of the 2 Mechanical/Electrical rooms, your Lighting Delta column for all of the rooms
should be white.
29 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
30 Click File menu ➤ Close.
In this exercise, you learned how to place lighting fixtures in ceiling plans, and how to verify the lighting layout using
the schedule that you created as a design tool in “Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels” on
page 225.
6 Position the switch preview on the interior wall of the room as shown, and click to place the switch.
7 Continue placing switches of this type in the remaining rooms in the 1-Lighting view as shown.
Level 1
8 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, click Device, and in the Type Selector, select M_Lighting Switches :
M_Three Way.
9 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan, and place a 3-way switch on the open office side of the upper
restroom wall as shown.
17 You can perform the following steps to complete this exercise, placing lighting switches in the remaining
Level 1 and Level 2 spaces or you can close this dataset, and go on to the next exercise. The lighting switches
are all placed in the next dataset.
On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, click Device, in the Type Selector, select M_Lighting Switches : M_Single
Pole, and place single pole switches in second-floor offices and restrooms as shown.
18 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
19 Click File menu ➤ Close.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click
1-Power to make it the active view.
2 Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the view.
3 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, click Device.
4 In the Type Selector, select M_Receptacle : M_Standard.
7 Continue placing receptacles throughout the offices on Level 1 and Level 2 approximately as shown,
including the wall-based receptacles in the open office areas.
2-Power
11 On the Options Bar, click (Place on Work Plane), and verify that Level : Level 1 is selected for Plane.
NOTE You can select a work plane from the Plane drop-down list on the Options Bar. The current level is selected
by default.
12 Zoom in on the upper-right corner of the Open Office, and place a receptacle on the floor as shown.
When placing a receptacle on a workplane, its connector is located below the level of the workplane. Just
as it was for ceiling hosted lighting fixtures, it is important that the connector be within the Room to allow
Revit MEP to maintain information about the electrical system and perform calculations for spaces in your
design. In the next steps, you will flip the workplane of the receptacle to locate the connector above the
workplane. Then you will create copies of the flipped receptacle to place the remaining floor-based
receptacles.
13 Select the receptacle and click (Flip WorkPlane) to locate the connector above the workplane (within
the room).
16 Select an Endpoint on the receptacle as the start point, and then place 3 copies of the receptacle in the
upper right area of the first floor, as shown.
18 Using the same procedure, place receptacles on the floor of the open office in 2-Power as shown.
TIP You can select all of the floor hosted receptacles in the 1-Power view, then copy and paste them in the
2-Power view. Select all 1-Power floor receptacles, click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard, open 2-Power, and
click Edit ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Current View.
19 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
20 Click File menu ➤ Close.
21 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports” on page 244.
In this exercise you placed wall-hosted receptacles on the walls and floor-hosted receptacles on the floor. It is good to
be familiar with this concept of placing hosted components, because it is quite common in Revit MEP.
■ Number
■ Name
■ Area
■ Actual Lighting Load
■ Actual Power Load
■ Actual Lighting Load/Area
■ Actual Power Load/Area
6 Click OK.
A schedule is created similar to the one shown.
In this exercise you created a schedule that can be used as input for the HVAC engineers or as input for energy analysis
and code review. The information in this schedule was produced using the data that you entered into the model.
Add a panel
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click
1-Power.
2 Zoom in on the Mechanical/Electrical room between the 2 restrooms.
3 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, click Electrical Equipment.
4 In the Type Selector, select M_480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard - Surface : M_250A, and click
to place the panel as shown.
5 On the Design Bar, click Modify and select the panel you just placed.
6 On the Options Bar, for Distribution Sys, select 480/277 Wye.
TIP The Distribution System Types parameter is also accessible in the Element Properties dialog. Right-click the
panel, click Element Properties, scroll down the Instance Parameters and, under Electrical - Loads, select 480/277
Wye for Distribution System Types.
9 Click OK.
Add a transformer
15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Instance Parameters, scroll down to the Electrical - Loads category,
and specify the following:
16 Click OK.
19 Click Modify.
20 Select the panel you just placed, and on the Options Bar, for Distribution Sys, select 120/208 Wye.
24 Using the same method, add the following components in the Mechanical/Electrical room in the 2-Power
view:
■ M_480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard - Surface : M_250A named H-2
■ M_480-120-208V Dry Type Transformers: M_45kVA named T2
■ M_208V MLO Lighting and Appliance Panelboard - Surface : M_100A named L-2
NOTE Remember to select the appropriate Distribution System Types parameter values for each equipment
component, including the Secondary Distribution System for T2.
28 On the Options Bar, select T2 for Panel to establish the connection between the L-2 panel and T2 transformer.
The Bounding Box expands to enclose the transformer and panel L-2 and you will see temporary circuit
indicating that the panel has been connected to the transformer.
30 On the Options Bar, click , and select panel H-2 for Panel. The temporary circuit displays as shown.
34 In the 2-Power view, select the H-2 panel, and on the Options Bar, click .
37 Close the 2-Power view, and maximize the 1-Power view to make it easier to work with.
42 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
43 Click File menu ➤ Close.
In this exercise you placed the electrical distribution equipment required for the project. You also defined how the
pieces of electrical equipment are connected by creating logical connections between the different pieces of equipment.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click
1-Power to make it the active view.
3 While pressing Ctrl, select all the receptacles in the corner room.
The generate wiring controls ( ) let you create permanent wiring for the circuit. For now, leave the
circuit as a temporary logical circuit. You will add permanent wiring in a later exercise.
5 Select one of the receptacles in the corner room, and observe that the information displayed indicates the
number of poles (#1), load (180 VA), and voltage (120 V).
A question mark is displayed for this receptacle because no Label has been specified in the Type Properties
for this particular receptacle type.
6 Click Modify.
7 Move the cursor over one of the receptacles in the corner room so that it is highlighted, press Tab, and click
to select the circuit again.
8 On the Options Bar, click (Select a Panel for the Circuit), and select panel L-1 as the panel for this
circuit.
NOTE You can click a panel in the drawing area or select the panel name from the drop-down list on the Options
Bar. The drop-down list on the Option Bar lists only those panels that are compatible with the circuit’s distribution
system and have an available circuit.
10 Click to select the circuit and all of the devices on the circuit.
12 On the Edit Circuit tab on the Design Bar, select Circuit Properties.
In the Element Properties dialog for this circuit, notice that most of the Instance Parameter values are
grayed out. They cannot be edited because they are calculated according to the components in the circuit.
The Voltage value for the circuit is 120V because all the receptacles and the panel in the circuit are 120V
components. The editable parameters include Wire Type and Rating will be discussed in a later exercise.
In the next 2 steps you will see how parameters interact as Revit MEP calculates values for the circuit.
14 Scroll back up to the Rating parameter, change the value from 20A to 50A, and then scroll back down to
Wire Size.
Notice that the Wire Size values have changed to 1-#6, 1-#6, 1-#10.
15 Click Cancel to close the Element Properties dialog and cancel your changes.
16 On the Design Bar, click Cancel Circuit.
17 Continue selecting receptacles, creating power circuits, and assigning them to panel L-1 on a room-by-room
basis for all of the offices around the perimeter of the building.
18 Select the receptacle in the stair well, click , click , and select panel L-1.
Panel L-1 is not listed on the drop-down list. If you select L-1 in the drawing, Revit MEP displays a warning
message indicating that adding this circuit group exceeds the number of available slots on panel L-1.
23 Select the receptacle in the stairwell again, click , and select panel L-1.
The circuit is created.
25 On the Options Bar, click , click , and then select panel L-1.
26 Continue creating circuits, as previously described, for the remaining groups of 4 floor-hosted receptacles.
NOTE Do not create a circuit for the 5 wall-hosted receptacles on the walls in the large open area at this time.
These will be connected in a later exercise.
27 Using the same procedures, create circuits in the 2-Power view and assign them to panel L-2.
NOTE Do not create a circuit for the 5 wall-hosted receptacles on the walls in the large open area of Level 2 at
this time. These will be connected in a later exercise.
29 Select the L-1 panel, and on the Options Bar, click (Edit Circuits on Panel).
30 Click OK.
31 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
32 Click File menu ➤ Close.
33 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires” on page 255.
In this exercise you learned how to create circuit groups (circuits) and assign the circuits to panels. You also learned
how voltage definitions and distribution systems determine the kinds of electrical systems that you can define for your
project. Finally, you learned how to add slots to a panel to accommodate circuits.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting, and double-click 1-Lighting to
make it the active view.
2 Zoom out so that the entire plan is visible.
3 Draw a pick box around the plan to select everything.
7 Close the message window and, click (Undo) to undo the circuit creation.
8 Select all the light fixtures and switches in the large open office (Open 1) as shown.
When creating wires, as in this step, you can choose to create either arc or chamfered wiring. Arc wiring
is sometimes used to indicate wiring that is concealed within walls, ceilings, or floors. Chamfered wiring
can be used to indicate wiring that is exposed.
11 Select the 4-way switch at the left end of the curved wall, move the cursor to highlight the 4-way switch
at the right end of the curved wall, press Tab, and click the switch to select the switches, lighting fixtures,
and wire segments on the path between the 2 switches.
Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the wire segments on the path between the switches (2 hot
conductors, one neutral conductor, and one ground conductor).
16 Using the same method, add a hot conductor to the wire segments between the remaining switches in the
large room and between the 2 switches in the Level 1 stairwell.
NOTE The Hot Conductors parameter value will be blank if the path being selected contains wire segments with
a combination of both 1 and 2 specified as the value for Hot Conductors. When this occurs, enter 2 as the value,
and click OK.
17 Create lighting circuits for the private offices, restrooms and stairwell on Level 1, and assign the circuits
to panel MDP.
The wiring layout should look similar to the following:
19 Create a lighting circuit for the open area on Level 2, assign the circuit to panel H-2.
20 Create lighting circuits and wiring for the private offices, lounge, conference room, and restrooms in the
2-Lighting view, and assign the circuits to panel H-2.
NOTE Do not include the two lighting fixtures and 3-way switch in the stairwell in either circuit. These will be
connected in a later exercise.
In this exercise you learned how to create lighting circuitry and used the basic methods for adding and editing wires.
You also learned about the settings that control how Revit MEP performs wire sizing. You also saw that the Revit MEP
warns you when you try to put too much load on a circuit, but does not prevent you from doing so.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click
1-Lighting to make it the active view.
2 Select all the lighting fixtures in the large open office (Open 1).
After creating the switch system, you decide to assign several fixtures to a different switch in the large open
area.
6 On the Edit Switch System tab, click Remove From System, and on the Options Bar, select Multiple.
The Options Bar provides the following information about the currently selected switch system.
■ Switch ID: the identifier for the switch that is currently assigned to the system.
■ Number of Fixtures: the number of components in the system (excluding the switch).
With Multiple selected on the Options Bar, you can use a pick box to select several fixtures. When you
have selected as many fixtures as you want, click Finish to confirm your selections.
7 Draw a pick box around the 6 lighting fixtures to the left of the restrooms.
14 Click .
15 On the Edit Switch System tab, click Select Switch, and select the switch on the wall outside the ladies’
restroom.
20 Click , and click the single-pole switch on the right wall of the office to designate the switch
controlling the fixtures in the office.
24 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, scroll down the Available fields list, double-click the
following fields—in the order shown—to add them to the Scheduled fields (in order) list:
■ Number
■ Name
26 On the Formatting tab, select Number from the Fields list, and for Heading, enter Room Number.
27 On the Embedded Schedule tab:
28 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, scroll down the Available fields list, double-click the
following fields—in the order shown—to add them to the Scheduled fields (in order) list:
■ Switch Id
■ Type
■ Panel
■ Circuit Number
29 Click OK twice.
30 For more practice, continue creating switch systems in the 2-Lighting view. Create separate systems for the
lounge, restrooms, conference room, and private offices. Create a system for all the lighting fixtures in the
large open area and assign them to the switch near the east stairwell. Specify Open Area - 2nd Floor for the
switch ID.
The Switch Systems schedule is automatically updated as you specify switch IDs or make changes to the
lighting.
Otherwise, close the dataset and go on to the next exercise, “Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs” on page
264.
31 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
32 Click File menu ➤ Close.
33 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs” on page 264.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click
1-Power to make it the active view.
2 Zoom in on the room at the upper-left corner of the plan.
3 In the corner room, move the cursor over one of the receptacles to highlight it, press Tab to highlight the
entire circuit, and click to select the circuit and all of the components connected to it.
4 On the Options Bar, click to generate arc type wiring for the selected circuit.
5 Using the same method, generate permanent wiring for the circuits in the remaining rooms along the left
side of the plan.
6 Select the home runs that extend out into the open office from the 2 upper rooms, and delete both home
runs.
7 Adjust the view so that the 2 upper rooms are visible.
8 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, click Wire.
11 Click in the open space near the door for the room to specify the second point for the wire, as shown.
12 Click the connector for the receptacle on the east wall of the middle room to specify the endpoint for the
wire.
13 Adjust the view so that the 2 lower rooms are visible, and using the same method, create wiring between
receptacles in the 2 lower rooms.
When completed, your layout should look similar to the following:
14 Click Modify.
15 Select the home run extending from the lower room, and notice the vertex controls at each end of the wire
and another in the center.
16 Drag the center vertex to the left so that it is closer to the receptacle in the lower room as shown.
17 Right click the wire run, select Insert Vertex, drag the new vertex along the wire run to a point midway
between the other vertex and the connector, and click.
18 Drag the vertex at the end of the home run toward the lower restroom, and drag the new vertex up and
to the left to arrange the wire run so that it looks similar to the following image.
19 For additional practice, you can continue creating permanent wiring for the circuits in the 1-Power and
2-Power views, or you can close this dataset and go on to the next exercise. Examples of completed plans
are provided below for reference.
Completed 1-Power
20 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
21 Click File menu ➤ Close.
In this exercise, you created wiring runs from the circuits that you created in a previous exercise and combined these
to form multi-circuit wiring runs. You also learned how to adjust the layout of wiring runs and interpret tick marks
and home run arrows.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click
1-Power to make it the active view.
2 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the drawing so that the corner room is visible.
3 Click Window menu ➤ Systems Browser.
The System Browser is displayed to right of the drawing area.
8 In the System Browser, right-click one of the devices under circuit 1, and click Select.
The device you selected in the System Browser is also selected in 1-Power.
This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. The list includes the main
distribution panel (MDP), a 3-way switch and 2 lighting fixtures in the Level 2 stairwell, 5 receptacles in
the open area of Level 1, and 5 receptacles in the open area of Level 2.
The lighting fixtures and 3-way switch in the 2-Lighting view have not yet been connected. You need to
add the switch and lighting fixtures in the upper level to the same circuit as the switches and lighting
fixtures in the lower level.
13 In the 1-Lighting view, select one of the lighting fixtures in the stairwell, and on the Options Bar, click
.
14 On the Edit Circuits tab on the Design Bar, click Add to Circuit.
15 Click the title bar of the 2-Lighting view, and select both lighting fixtures and the 3-way switch in the
Level 2 stairwell.
16 Click Finish Circuit.
In the System Browser, the 2 lighting fixtures and 3-way switch have been moved from the Unassigned
folder to Power ➤ MDP ➤ Circuit 2.
17 Highlight one of the lighting fixtures in the Level 2 stairwell, press Tab, click to select the circuit, and on
18 In the 1-Lighting view, select the 3-way switch in the stairwell, click the title bar of the 2-Lighting view,
highlight the 3-way switch in the Level 2 stairwell, press Tab, and click to select all of the components in
the path between the 2 switches.
21 Click .
22 In the Element Properties dialog, under Instance Parameters, for Hot Conductors, enter 2, and click OK.
In the System Browser, the only remaining unassigned components should be the MDP and the receptacles
in the 2 open areas.
23 In the Project Browser, double-click 1-Power to make it the active view, arrange the view so that the System
Browser and the 5 unassigned receptacles are visible.
24 In the drawing area, select the unassigned receptacles in the open area.
25 On the Options Bar, click to create a power circuit for these receptacles.
28 Using the same method, create a power circuit for the 5 unassigned receptacles in Open 2 in the 2-Power
view.
The MDP panel is now the only component listed in the Unassigned category.
Check Circuits
This warning refers to the feed from the outside power service and can be ignored.
In this exercise, you learned how to use the System Browser to examine electrical components in your project and
resolve unassigned and unnamed circuits. You also learned how to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the
circuits in your project were connected.
Examination of the loads on Phase A, B, and C shows a slight imbalance with the heaviest load on Phase
B (4860 VA), while Phase A provides 4500 VA, and Phase C provides 4140 VA.
NOTE If you have continued to save and use your own dataset throughout these tutorials, you may see different
values for the loads. This is because you may have selected a different mix of lighting fixtures to attain the required
lighting levels.
The values on the right side shows the load presented by transformer T1 (12780 VA). Transformer T1 was
specified as a 45kVA transformer but, the load connected to it is less than 15kVA. Therefore, you can use
a 30kVA transformer, which will require a 40A circuit breaker.
10 In the Edit Circuits dialog, for panel H-2, enter 100A for the Trip value, and for T1, enter 40A for the Trip
value.
The lighting circuits connected to MDP are already specified as 20A circuits, so no further changes are
required.
11 Click OK.
12 In 1-Power view, in the Mechanical/Electrical room, select the T1 transformer.
13 In the Type Selector, select M_480-120-208V Phase Dry Type Transformer: M_30kVA.
15 In the Mechanical/Electrical room, select panel L-1, on the Options Bar, click , and select T1 from
the drop-down list on the Options Bar.
Now that you have specified transformer T1 as a 30kVA transformer and restored it to the circuit, you
should verify that the wire sizes for panel L-1 is set correctly.
18 Click OK.
19 With panel L-1 selected, on the Options Bar, click (Circuit Properties).
20 In the Element Properties dialog for the circuit, scroll down and verify that the current value for the Wire
Size parameter is 3-#12, 1-#12, 1-#12.
21 Under Electrical-Loads, enter 100A for Rating.
Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating.
22 Scroll down, and click the value for the Wire Size parameter.
Notice that it changes to 3-#3, 1-#3, 1-#8.
23 Click OK.
24 In the Project Browser, double-click 2-Power to make it the active view.
25 In the Mechanical/Electrical room, select panel H-2, and on the Options Bar, click .
Similar to the situation you observed for transformer T1, the load presented by T2 is less than 14kVA and
you decide to change the transformer from 45kVA to 30kVA, which will require a 40A circuit breaker.
26 In the Edit Circuits dialog, for transformer T2, enter 40A for the Trip value.
31 In the Mechanical/Electrical room, select panel L-2, , and on the Options Bar, select T2.
Now that you have set transformer T2 to be a 30kVA transformer and restored it to the circuit, you should
verify that the size of panel L-2 is set correctly.
in an office building, including plumbing fixtures, hot and cold water piping,
and sanitary piping. As you create the plumbing system, you follow a series of
lessons and exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for
Revit MEP 2008. By following this workflow, you learn system design best practices
while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems designing more efficient.
The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design plumbing systems using Revit
MEP 2008. At the end of this tutorial, you will understand the process,
The datasets that you use to complete these exercises are located in the Training
Files directory. You can search the Training Files ➤ Metric directory to verify that
the datasets have been downloaded. If the tutorial datasets are not present, go to
NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially; each
exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. After finishing each
exercise, you can choose to save your work. However, it is highly recommended that
you always begin an exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides. This
dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training
session.
281
Planning Plumbing Systems
Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project; planning is critical to a successful design. In
this lesson, you plan each system by loading the fixtures and fittings that you will need to design the plumbing system.
5 Click Open.
6 In the Project Browser, expand Families ➤ Plumbing Fixtures.
Notice that 2 folders have been added to the families currently available for your design: M_Toilet - Wall
Mounted Flush Valve and Wall Hung Urinal.
11 Click Open.
The selected component families are loaded into the project. All of the loaded families, are added under
Families in the Project Browser.
12 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
13 Click File menu ➤ Close.
14 Proceed to the next exercise, “Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems” on page 283.
10 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
11 Click File menu ➤ Close.
The men’s room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls, 3 wall-mounted urinals, and 3 sinks.
7 Move the cursor into the stall to the left, and when the preview of the toilet is 160 from the upper wall
and 460 from the right wall, click to place the toilet.
9 Select Wall Hung Urinal : Standard in the Type Selector, and on the Options Bar, verify that (Place on
Vertical Face) is selected.
10 Move the cursor over the upper-left corner of the men’s room, and when the preview of the urinal is 500
from the left wall, click to place the toilet.
12 Click Modify.
13 On the Design Bar, click Dimension.
14 On the Options Bar, verify that (Aligned) is selected, Wall centerlines is selected for Prefer, and Individual
References is selected for Pick.
15 Click the centerline of the left wall, move the cursor over the center of the leftmost urinal, and click.
16 Move the cursor down, and click to place the dimension annotation.
17 Using the same method, place a dimension annotation for the rightmost toilet.
18 Working from left to right, click the centerline of each urinal, move the cursor up, and click to place the
dimension annotation.
Select the dimension annotation above the urinals, and click the blue (Equal Control) above the
dimension values to space the urinals evenly along the wall.
20 Press Delete to remove the dimension from the drawing, and click Unconstrain in the warning dialog.
21 While pressing Ctrl, select the 2 remaining dimension annotations, and press Delete.
Place sinks
22 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar, click Plumbing Fixture, and in the Type Selector, select Sink -
Single Island : Public.
23 On the Options click (Place on Work Plane), and for Plane, select Pick.
24 In the Work Plane dialog, under Specify a new Work Plane, select Pick a plane, and click OK.
25 In the drawing area, select the counter top.
26 Move the cursor over the counter top in the lower-right corner of the men’s room, and press the Space Bar
twice to rotate the sink into the proper orientation.
28 Place a second sink near the right wall, and place a third sink between the other 2 sinks as shown. (The
placement is not critical.
29 Click Modify.
30 On the Design Bar, click Dimension.
31 Using the same method you used to evenly space the urinals, specify the distance between the rightmost
sink and the right wall as 560, equalize the space between sinks, and then delete the dimension annotations.
32 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar, click Plumbing Fixture, and in the Type selector, select M_Round
Floor Drain : 125.
33 On the Options click (Place on Work Plane), and for Plane, select Level : Level 2.
34 Move the cursor to a point where the walls for the toilet stalls meet, as shown, and click to place the floor
drain.
35 Click Modify.
36 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
37 Click File menu ➤ Close.
38 Proceed to the next exercise, “Begin Creating the Sanitary System ” on page 289.
11 In the left panel, click Branch, and select Sanitary from the System Type list.
12 In the table:
13 Click OK.
14 When you are creating systems the System Browser can help you identify components that have not been
added to a system.
Click Window ➤ System Browser.
TIP You can also access the system browser using the F9 keyboard shortcut.
15 Click the title bar for the browser, and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area.
16 Right-click in the system browser table, click View ➤ Piping.
17 Expand the Unassigned folder, and notice that all of the plumbing fixtures are currently unassigned.
18 Zoom in on the chase near the top-right corner of the second floor men’s room.
19 On the Mechanical tab on the Design Bar, click Mechanical Equipment, and in the Type Selector, select
Pipe Sanitary Outlet : Standard.
NOTE If you do not find the sanitary outlet among any of the families included with Revit MEP, you can copy
the sanitary outlet from this tutorial into your other projects.
20 Move the cursor over the chase, and click to place the sanitary outlet approximately as shown.
21 Click Modify.
22 The elevation of the sanitary outlet with relation to the other components in the system is critical. The
elevation will be specified as -1200, low enough to allow sloping the sanitary piping in the system.
Right-click the sanitary outlet in the view, and click Element Properties.
23 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, enter -1200 for Offset, and click OK.
24 Zoom in on the men’s room, and draw a left-to-right pick box around the urinals, toilets, and floor drain,
as shown.
26 On the Options bar, click (Select Equipment for System), and click the sanitary outlet in the drawing
area.
28 Click Solutions, and on the Options Bar, enter 1.00 for Slope.
29 Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type.
Up to 6 piping layout solutions are suggested on the Options Bar. You can click (Previous) and
(Next Solution), as needed, to view them. The layout preview displays the main piping as blue lines and
the branch piping as green lines. For more information on Layout Path solutions, see Layout Paths.
31 Select the horizontal branch segment above the leftmost urinal, and use the (Parallel Movement
Control) control to drag the segment into the middle of the chase above the urinals, as shown.
■ Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures, and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity. The first tab
highlights the fixture and the branch. The second tab highlights the fixture, branch and the fixture
connecting it to the main segment. The third tab should highlight the entire system.
■ Select each pipe segment in the system, and check the slope control. The slope control for every segment
should indicate that the slope is toward the sanitary outlet, as shown.
■ Examine the sanitary tees to assure proper orientation. When fittings are reversed, select the fitting
■ Casework
■ Ceilings
■ Columns
■ Curtain Panels
■ Curtain Systems
■ Curtain Wall Mullions
■ Doors
■ Floors
■ Lines
■ Railings
■ Roofs
■ Shaft Openings
■ Stairs
■ Walls
■ Windows
38 Click OK.
39 On the View Control Bar, specify Fine for Detail Level, and Hidden Line for Model Graphics Style.
42 Proceed to the next exercise, “Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System” on page 296 to continue creating
the sanitary system.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 2 - Plumbing to
make it the active view.
2 Zoom in on the piping to the right of the men’s room.
3 Select the sanitary elbow to the right of the rightmost toilet, and click the plus sign below the fitting to
upgrade the fitting to a tee.
5 Verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector, and on the Options Bar, click Options.
6 In the Layout Options dialog, enter 1.00 for Slope Angle, enter 1000 for Slope Run, and click OK.
7 Drag the preview of the pipe down parallel to the wall, press the Space Bar once, enter 3950, and press Enter.
When you press the space bar, the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the
fitting. Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool,
which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. Pressing Return completes the
dimensioning.
8 Click Modify.
If you select the pipe, you can verify that the slope has been applied in the correct direction: toward the
sanitary outlet.
9 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar, click Pipe Fitting, and select M_Pipe Glued Reducing DWV Wye
: Standard in the Type Selector.
10 Move the cursor over the open end of the pipe, and when the extension snap displays, click to place the
fitting.
14 Using the method learned earlier, highlight the wye, and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity.
15 Select the wye fitting, right click the connector on the open leg, and click Draw Pipe.
16 Verify that the Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector, and on the Options Bar, click
Options.
17 In the Layout Options dialog, verify that the slope is specified as 1.00 for Slope Angle, and click OK.
18 Drag the end of the pipe to the left and down toward the centerline of the wall below the sinks, press the
Space Bar once so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fitting, and when the wall centerline
snap displays, click to specify the end of the pipe.
20 On the Options Bar, enter 150 for Offset, click Apply, and click Modify.
Changing the Offset while drawing pipe creates a vertical segment. In this case, the vertical pipe extends
150 above the level of the floor.
21 In the Project Browser, expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views and double-click 3D Plumbing to view the piping
just added.
22 In the 3D view, check the slope and connectivity for the added piping as described previously.
23 Zoom in on the vertical segment behind the middle sink.
24 On the Plumbing tab, click Pipe Fitting, and in the Type Selector select M_Pipe Glued Double DWV Wye
: Standard.
25 Move the cursor near the open end of the vertical pipe, and when the Extension snap displays and the end
is outlined in blue, press Space, and click to place the fitting.
26 Select the double wye fitting, and on the Options Bar, specify 200 for Offset.
32 Click Modify.
33 Select the elbow and horizontal pipe segment just added, and press Delete, leaving only the short pipe
segment connected to the double wye.
34 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar, click Pipe again.
35 Click the connector snap on the left leg, press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation
of the fitting, and on the Options Bar, click Options.
36 In the Layout Options dialog, verify that 45.00 for Slope Angle is specified, and click OK.
37 Drag the pipe to the left, and when Horizontal and Extension displays, click to specify the end of the pipe.
38 Click Modify.
39 Select the elbow and horizontal pipe segment just added, and press Delete, leaving only the short pipe
segment connected to the double wye.
50 Click Modify.
51 Select Pipe again, and use the same method to connect drain pipes to the other 2 sinks.
54 While pressing Ctrl, select the 3 short segments of pipe connected to the double wye, and on the Options
Bar, specify 40 mm for Size.
55 While pressing Ctrl, select the short pipe connected to the right leg of the double wye and the horizontal
pipe from the drain of the rightmost sink.
56 On the Options Bar, click Routing Solutions.
Routing Solution tools are activated on the Options Bar that let you (Add Control Points) or (Remove
Control Points), and select a proposed solution. You use the plus and minus buttons to add vertex controls
to pipe segments. Transitions and fittings are automatically added to maintain connections. You use
57 Select solution 3 of 3, and click Finish to create piping for that solution.
58 While pressing Ctrl, select the short pipe connected to the center leg of the double wye and the horizontal
pipe from the drain of the middle sink, and on the Options Bar, click Routing Solutions.
59 Select solution 2 of 2, and click Finish to create piping for the middle sink.
60 Using the same method, select the pipe connected to the left leg and create the piping by selecting solution
3 of 3.
61 Click Finish to create piping for the third sink.
62 Draw a right-to-left pick box to select the elbow and adjoining 2 pipes between the double wye and the
sink drain for the rightmost sink as shown.
63 On the Options Bar, click (Slope) to activate the slope tools on the Options Bar.
The arrow points away from the reference end of the slope. You could have entered a negative value for
slope and clicked to specify the end closest to the sink as the reference (with the arrow pointing
toward the double wye).
65 Using the same method, specify the slope for the piping for the remaining sinks.
66 In the System Browser, expand Sanitary ➤ M_Pipe Sanitary Outlet : M_Standard, right-click Sanitary 1, and
click Select.
70 Zoom in and select the double wye fitting for the sink drains, and press the up arrow on your keyboard
twice.
The fitting moves up and at the same time the piping attached to its legs automatically adjusts and maintains
connectivity. The amount of adjustment with each keystroke depends is proportional to the zoom level.
When zoomed in close, there is a smaller movement.
71 Press the down arrow on the keyboard twice to return the fitting to its original location.
When the piping was created for the sink drains, M_Pipe PVC Bend : M_Standard components were used
because the shorter size of this fitting works well with the automated Routing Solutions. Now that the
routing is completed, you can change these to the more commonly used M_Pipe Glued DWV Bend :
Standard.
72 While pressing Ctrl, select the 2 bends connecting the 45-degree legs of the double-wye to the horizontal
pipe segments, and in the Type Selector, select M_Pipe Glued DWV Bend : Standard.
74 Using the method learned earlier, highlight the leftmost sink, and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity.
(After the third tab, the entire system should be highlighted.)
75 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save As; otherwise, skip the next 2 steps.
76 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
77 Click File menu ➤ Close.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Plumbing to
make it the active view.
2 Zoom in on the elbow at the upper end of the vertical pipe connected to the sanitary outlet, and select the
horizontal pipe.
3 Click the pipe’s connector snap at the elbow, and carefully drag it away from the elbow, while maintaining
the same angle.
5 Zoom in on the sanitary outlet, select it and on the toolbar, click (Move).
6 Click on the sanitary outlet to specify a start point for the move as shown.
7 Drag the preview approximately 200 along the horizontal line away from the elbow, and click to specify
the endpoint for the move as shown.
9 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar, click Pipe Fitting, and select M_Pipe Glued Reducing DWV Wye
: Standard.
10 Move the cursor over the center of the open end of the vertical pipe, and when the Extension snap displays,
press the Space Bar once (so that the fitting assumes the elevation of the end of the pipe), and click to place
the fitting.
If necessary, select the wye, and click to rotate the 45 degree leg until it is pointing toward the sanitary
piping.
12 Select the wye, click the value for the 45 degree leg, enter 100 to change its size, and press Enter.
13 Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans, double-click 2 - Plumbing, and zoom
in on the sanitary outlet.
14 On the View tab on the Design Bar, click Section, draw a section to the right of the sanitary outlet as shown,
and click Modify.
25 Select the elbow and horizontal pipe segment just added, and press Delete, leaving only the short pipe
segment connected to the wye.
26 While pressing Ctrl, select the short pipe segment and the main pipe, and on the Options Bar, click Routing
Solutions.
27 Select solution 2 of 2, and click Finish to create piping for that solution.
34 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
35 Click File menu ➤ Close.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 2 - Plumbing to
make it the active view.
2 Zoom in on the piping behind the urinals, and draw a left-to-right pick box around the piping above the
urinals as shown. (If necessary, use the Filter tool to select only piping.)
3 Press Delete.
4 Select the pipe connected to the wye above the leftmost toilet, click the connector snap, and drag it to the
right to a point midway between the toilet and urinal.
5 Right-click the connector at the open end of the shortened pipe, click Draw Pipe, press the Space Bar so that
the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe.
6 On the Options Bar, verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector, and click Options.
7 In the Layout Options dialog, specify 1.00 for Slope Angle.
8 On the Options Bar, specify 50 for D (diameter), drag the preview to the left approximately 200, and click
to specify the end of the pipe.
9 On the Options Bar, enter 300 for Offset, and move the cursor along the center line of the chase, to a point
in line with the center of the leftmost urinal, and when the snap displays, click once to specify the end of
the pipe.
10 Drag the preview over the urinal drain, press Tab until the Sanitary connection displays on the status bar
at the bottom of the window, click to specify the end of the pipe at the sanitary drain connector.
11 Click Modify.
12 In the Project Browser, expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views, double-click 3D- Plumbing to make
it the active view, and click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast.
17 Click to specify the start of the pipe, press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation
properties of the existing pipe, and on the Options Bar, click Options.
18 In the Layout Options dialog, verify that the slope is specified as 1.00 for Slope Angle, and click OK.
19 Drag the preview down to the sanitary connector on the middle urinal, and click to specify the end of the
pipe at the sanitary drain connector.
20 Click Modify.
21 Right-click the section of pipe that you just added, and click Create Similar.
22 Move the cursor over the intersection of the branch pipe and the centerline snap for the rightmost urinal.
23 Click to specify the start of the pipe, drag the preview down to the sanitary connector on the urinal, and
click to specify the end of the pipe at the sanitary drain connector.
24 Click Modify.
25 In the Project Browser, expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views, double-click 3D- Plumbing to make
it the active view, and check the slope and connectivity as described previously.
In the next steps you will change the elbow behind the left urinal to a tee to create the cleanout. However,
you cannot upgrade an elbow to a tee unless all of the connections are the same size. So, first you must
temporarily resize the pipe to the urinal.
Add a cleanout
29 Select the pipe between the 80 elbow and the left urinal, and on the Options Bar, specify 80 for D (diameter).
Redefine fittings
34 Select the 3 sanitary tees behind the urinals, and in the Type Selector, select M_Pipe Glued Short Reducing
Sanitary Tee : Standard.
This eliminates the need for transitions between the pipes and the tees.
35 In the Project Browser, expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views, double-click 3D- Plumbing to make
it the active view, and zoom in on the area between the toilet and the leftmost urinal.
36 Select the vertical pipe, and drag it to a point midway between the 2 sanitary tees.
This will provide the space required to change the short elbows to the DWV Bends that allow better sanitary
waste flow.
Select the elbows at each end of the vertical pipe, and select M_Pipe PVC DVW Bend : Standard.
39 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
40 Click File menu ➤ Close.
41 Proceed to the next exercise, “Adding Vents to the System” on page 317 to continue creating the plumbing
system.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views and double-click 3D Plumbing to view the piping
just added.
If necessary, clear unwanted components from the 3D view using the Visibility/Graphics dialog as described
previously.
2 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast, and zoom in on the area between the toilets and the urinals.
3 Select the elbow at the upper end of the vertical pipe segment, and click the + control above it to change
the fitting to a tee.
4 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar, click Pipe, and in the Type Selector, select Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary
Vent.
5 Click the connector at the upper end of the tee to specify the start of the pipe.
6 On the Options Bar, click Options.
7 In the Layout Options dialog, specify 0.00 for Slope Angle, and click OK.
8 On the Options Bar, specify 50 for D (diameter), and specify 2700 for Offset.
NOTE You must move the cursor into the drawing area for the new offset value to be recognized.
9 Click Apply.
10 Click Modify.
11 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar, click Pipe, and verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent is selected
in the Type Selector.
13 On the Options Bar, specify 2700 for Offset, and click Apply.
14 Click Modify.
15 Using the same method, place another vent between the two rightmost urinals, as shown.
16 If either of the tees that were added need to be reoriented according to the slope of the piping, use the Flip
control to make the adjustment.
17 Select the vertical vent between the 2 rightmost urinals, right-click the connector at the open end, click
Draw Pipe.
18 Press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the vent pipe.
19 Drag the pipe preview toward the middle vent, and click the connector at the open end of the middle vent
to specify the endpoint for the pipe.
20 Select the elbow at the top of the middle vent pipe, and click the + control above it to change the elbow
to a tee.
21 On the Plumbing tab of the Design Bar, click Pipe, and in the Type Selector, select Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary
Vent.
22 Click the connector at the open leg of the tee to specify a starting point for the pipe.
23 On the Options Bar, specify 3000 for Offset, click Apply, and click Modify.
A short section of pipe is added to the tee.
24 Select the tee and click the plus symbol to its left to change the tee to a cross.
25 Select the leftmost vent, right click the connector, and click Draw Pipe.
26 Drag the pipe preview a short distance, and press Space.
27 Continue dragging the preview to the open connector on the tee at the upper end of the middle vent, and
click to specify the end point.
29 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast, and zoom in on the area of the double wye behind the sinks.
30 Select the elbow above the double wye for the drain section to the middle sink, and click the + control
above the elbow to change it to a tee.
31 While pressing Ctrl, select the tee and the short pipe segment that connects it to the double wye, and on
the Options Bar, specify 50 for D (diameter).
32 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar, click Pipe, and verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent is selected
in the Type Selector.
33 Click the connector at the upper end of the tee to specify the start of the pipe.
34 On the Options Bar, specify 50 for D (diameter), and specify 2700 for Offset, click Apply.
38 Highlight any component in the system and press Tab 3 times to check the connectivity of the system as
described previously.
39 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
40 Click File menu ➤ Close.
41 Proceed to the next exercise, “Create the Cold Water System” on page 323 to continue creating the plumbing
system.
Specify Mechanical Settings for the cold and hot water systems
14 In the Project Browser, expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 2 - Plumbing to
make it the active view.
15 Press F9 to open the System Browser, click the title bar for the browser and dock it by dragging it to the
bottom of the drawing area.
16 Right-click a table heading in the system browser, click View ➤ Piping.
29 Click Modify.
30 Select the middle sink in the view, and on the Options Bar, click (Connect Into).
31 In the Select Connector dialog, select the domestic cold water connector, and click the cold water pipe
behind the sinks.
36 Click Modify.
37 Zoom in on the area above the toilets, and verify that the cold water pipe is not obstructed by the vertical
vent. (If necessary, select the cold water pipe, and use the keyboard left arrow to move the pipe to the left.)
38 Zoom in on the area between the toilets.
39 On the Plumbing tab, click Pipe.
40 Move the cursor over a point on the cold water pipe just above the wall, click the snap on the cold water
pipe, and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe.
41 Drag the preview to the left, and at a point near the vent that rises between the toilets and urinals, click
to specify the end of the pipe.
42 On the Options Bar, specify 600 for Offset, and click Apply.
45 Zoom in on the area behind the toilets, select the rightmost toilet.
46 On the Options Bar click (Connect Into), and then click the vertical cold water pipe.
Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector.
47 Select the elbow behind the toilet, and click the + control to change it to a tee.
48 On the Plumbing tab, click Pipe.
51 Click Modify.
52 Select the leftmost toilet, and on the Options Bar click , and click the horizontal cold water pipe
that you added to the tee.
Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector.
53 Select the rightmost urinal, and on the Options Bar click , and click the vertical cold water pipe.
Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector.
54 Use the same method to connect the remaining urinals to the horizontal cold water pipe.
55 On the toolbar, click (Dynamic Modify View) or enter the keyboard shortcut, F8.
56 While pressing Shift, drag the cursor to spin the 3D Plumbing view to allow selecting the main cold water
piping from the mechanical room, and then select the horizontal segments as shown.
66 Proceed to the next exercise, “Create the Hot Water System” on page 330.
4 Draw a left-to-right pick box around the 3 sinks in the men’s room, and on the Options Bar, click
(Filter).
5 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK.
16 On the Edit System tab, click Add to System, select the water heater in the view, and click Finish System.
17 In the System Browser, expand Domestic Cold Water, right-click Domestic Cold Water 1, and click Select.
20 Select the water heater in the view, and on the Options Bar, click (Connect Into).
21 In the Select Connector dialog, select Connector 2 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 20, and click the main
cold water pipe.
A segment of pipe is added connecting the water heater to the cold water system.
22 Select the open end of the main cold water pipe, right-click the connector, click Draw Pipe, and add 2
segments extending the main cold water piping into the chase.
27 Click Modify.
28 On the Plumbing tab, click Pipe, and in the Type Selector, select Pipe Types : Hot Water.
29 Move the cursor over the hot water connector on the leftmost sink, click to specify the starting point for
the pipe, and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector.
30 On the Options Bar, specify 800 for Offset.
33 Click Modify.
34 Select the middle sink in the view, and on the Options Bar, click (Connect Into), and click the hot
water pipe below the sinks.
In this case, the Select Connector dialog was not displayed because the only possible connection was to
the hot water system.
43 Click Modify.
44 In the Project Browser, expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans, double-click 2 - Plumbing.
45 Highlight a fixture in the view, press Tab 3 times to check connectivity as described previously.
46 You can save the open file if you wish.
47 Click File menu ➤ Close.
building. As you create the systems, you follow a series of exercises that teach the
recommended systems design workflow for Revit MEP 2008. By following the
recommended workflow, you learn the best practices for designing systems with
Revit MEP.
The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a fire protection system using
Revit MEP 2008. At the end of this tutorial, you will understand the process,
NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially; each
exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. After finishing each
exercise, you can choose to save your work. However, it is highly recommended that
you always begin an exercise by opening the provided dataset. This dataset includes
the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. The
datasets that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric
directory. You can search this directory to verify that the datasets have been
downloaded. If the tutorial datasets are not present, go to
http://www.autodesk.com/revitmep-documentation and download them.
335
Designing Fire Protection Systems
Designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward process. In this lesson, you will create both wet and
dry fire protection systems for the second floor of an office building. You begin each fire protection system design by
placing sprinklers in the rooms. Then, you create a system to logically connect the sprinklers, and finally, you create
piping to physically connect the sprinklers. During the fire protection design process, you create views and pipe types,
manually modify the pipes and fittings, insert fittings, create schedules, and size and tag the pipes.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, right-click the
view named 2 - Mech, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.
A new view called Copy of 2 - Mech is created and becomes the active view. This view is based on the 2 -
Mech view properties.
TIP Working in different views for each discipline allows you to view only the system components for that
discipline and makes system design more efficient.
4 With the 2 - Fire Prot view active, right-click in the drawing area, and click View Properties.
5 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, do the following:
6 Click OK.
This new sub-discipline creates a Fire Protection view category in the Project Browser. Notice that the 2 -
Fire Prot view is now relocated under Fire Protection.
TIP After you enter a discipline or sub-discipline for the first time, you can then select that discipline or
sub-discipline from the list.
■ Create a level 1 floor plan view based on 1-Mech view, naming it 1 - Fire Prot.
■ Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Ceiling Plans, and create a new ceiling plan view
based on the 2 - Ceiling Mech view, naming it 2 - Ceiling Fire Prot.
■ Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views, and create a new 3D view based on
the 3D HVAC view, naming it 3D Fire Prot.
8 In the Project Browser, double-click the HVAC listing to collapse it because you will no longer use those
views in this lesson.
Next, you create 2 new pipe types for the wet and dry systems.
NOTE If the Fire Protection tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click Fire
Protection.
15 In the Type Properties dialog, under Mechanical, for Material, select Carbon Steel.
Next, you create a pipe type based on the new pipe type that you created.
16 With the Type Properties dialog open, click Duplicate, and enter Fire Protection Dry for the new pipe
type name, and click OK.
Notice that the new dry pipe type inherits the same type properties from the wet pipe type, including the
new material property.
17 Click OK twice to create the new wet and dry pipe types.
18 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet and Pipe Types : Fire Protection Dry are
listed.
NOTE You can also create, modify, or verify pipe types from the Project Browser. In the Project Browser, expand
Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types, right-click a pipe type and use the context menu.
TIP When you click Modify, the command in progress terminates. You can also press Esc.
20 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar, click Mechanical Settings.
You can also click Settings menu ➤ Mechanical Settings.
21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog, under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion, select Main.
22 For System Type, select Fire Protection Wet.
The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display.
IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main
and other obstacles. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes, duct, structural beams, or architecture.
27 Click OK.
NOTE Conversion settings are mechanical settings that are used when you convert the pipe layout path to
physical piping. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. However,
you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. Configuring the
Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. You can
also configure these settings by clicking Settings on the Options Bar when the Layout Path tool is open. For more
information, refer to Help.
Next, you begin the design by drawing the supply pipe for the fire protection systems.
28 In the Project Browser, double-click the 1 - Fire Prot floor plan view to make it active.
29 Enter ZR, and sketch a zoom region around Stairwell 30 (located in the lower-right corner of the building).
Notice that the cursor changes to a magnifying glass indicating that the Zoom tool is active.
TIP If a view does not contain room tags, you can easily identify a room by placing the cursor over the room
component (indicated by 2 diagonal intersecting lines). The room name and number display in a tooltip and on
the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar).
NOTE The Thin Lines display is not saved during your design session. You will need to reactivate it, if you reopen
Revit MEP.
NOTE You can press Tab after specifying the Offset to confirm the value.
34 Place the cursor in the lower-left corner of the stairwell, and click in the approximate area to specify the
pipe start point.
35 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 6400, and click Apply to specify the pipe end point.
The new pipe displays.
IMPORTANT After finishing each exercise, you can choose to save your work. However, it is highly recommended
that you always begin each exercise by opening the dataset provided. This dataset includes the work from the
previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.
In this exercise, you created new views and modified view properties. You then created 2 new pipe types for the wet
and dry fire protection systems and modified their type properties. The conversion settings for both wet and dry fire
protection systems were also configured. Finally, you drew the supply pipe for fire protection systems. In the next
exercise, you place the wet system sprinklers and create a schedule.
Define columns
3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select Area, and click Add.
This adds the Area field to the list of scheduled fields to include in the schedule. Scheduled fields display
as columns in the schedule.
4 While pressing Ctrl, select the following fields from the Available fields list:
■ Level
■ Name
■ Number
6 Select a field, and use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to arrange the Scheduled fields list as follows:
■ Number
■ Name
■ Level
■ Area
Next, you create a calculated value parameter to indicate the minimum number of sprinklers required per
room. This information is based on the project specification and the fire protection codes.
9 Click OK.
The Min. Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). This
calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine which rooms meet the sprinkler design
and code requirements.
A new view called Room Schedule opens and is located under Schedules/Quantities in the Project Browser.
Notice that only the data for the level 2 rooms displays, sorted according to room number. You can refer
to the minimum number of sprinklers per room data as you place sprinklers in order to satisfy the design
and code requirements. Although you rounded the data to one decimal place, you will want to round all
decimals up to the next whole number.
IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. You can
change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. Each change is dynamic and immediately
propagates throughout your project as if you had used the Element Properties dialog. This is because you are
modifying the digital database of building information. This digital database information source is the central
concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).
Next, you place the wet system sprinklers in the level 2 rooms.
Place a sprinkler
14 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Ceiling Plans, and
double-click 2- Ceiling Fire Prot to make it the active view.
15 Enter ZR, and sketch a zoom region around Office 6 (located in the upper-left corner of the building).
18 Click OK.
19 On the Options Bar, do the following:
20 Place the cursor at the ceiling grid intersection as shown, and after the intersection snap displays, click to
specify the line start point.
21 Draw the line diagonally to the opposite grid intersection, and after the intersection snap displays, click
to specify the line end point.
22 With the Lines tool active, right-click in the drawing area, and click View Properties.
23 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Underlay, select Level 2.
24 Click OK.
The line displays.
25 Using the same method, draw a second diagonal line that intersects the first at the center of the ceiling
tile.
30 On the Options Bar, click (Place on Face) to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face.
31 With the view zoomed, place the cursor over the intersection of the 2 lines, and after the mid point snap
displays, click to place the sprinkler.
You use this sprinkler to place the other sprinklers. Next, you delete the reference lines.
NOTE When placing sprinklers, snap to the ceiling grid intersections rather than entering placement dimensions.
Grid snapping ensures accurate placement in the ceiling tiles.
33 While pressing CTRL, click both reference lines, and then press Delete.
34 Right-click in the drawing area, and click View Properties.
35 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Underlay, select None, and click OK.
This removes the Level 2 underlay from the ceiling plan view. The underlay was used only to display the
reference lines. Next, you continue placing sprinklers.
TIP Using the Copy tool is a 2-click process. First specify the start point on the element that you want to copy
and then specify the end point (or destination). You can also enter CO to activate the Copy tool.
38 On the Options Bar, verify that Constrain and Multiple are cleared, and that Copy is selected.
39 Zoom out so that the entire Office 6 ceiling grid is visible.
40 Select the upper-left corner of the ceiling grid, and after the intersection snap displays, click to specify the
copy start point.
41 Move the cursor diagonally to the lower-right as shown, and after the intersection snap displays, click to
specify the copy end point.
Notice that the copy selection border follows the cursor, and listening dimensions display to aid in
placement.
A copy of the sprinkler is immediately placed after you specify the end point.
47 In Office 6, place the cursor over the upper-left ceiling grid intersection immediately above the sprinkler
that you selected, and after the intersection snap displays, click to specify the copy start point.
51 While pressing CTRL, select the 2 sprinklers that you placed in Office 7.
NOTE Similar to the Move or Copy tool, creating an array is a 2-step process. You first specify an array start
point, then you move the cursor to the second or last location (if you have more than 2 arrays), to specify array
end point.
55 Move the cursor to the left along the same horizontal ceiling grid, and after the intersection snap displays,
click to specify the array end point as shown.
Notice that an outline follows the cursor to aid in placement.
Notice that all elements in the 2 - Ceiling Fire Prot view range are selected.
58 On the Options Bar, click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements.
59 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Sprinklers, and click OK.
IMPORTANT When selecting components either by drawing a pick box (drag left to right), by cross-picking
(drag right to left), or by selecting individual components, you are selecting all components that are visible in
the active view (within the view range). If the selection contains an unwanted component, you can clear it by
filtering, or by pressing SHIFT and selecting the component.
NOTE If you have difficulty locating the mid point snap, enter SM to override all other snaps and display only
mid point snaps.
65 Zoom to show Office 8 and the part of the adjacent common area, Open 2.
66 Select the lower-right Office 8 sprinkler.
You copy this sprinkler to Open 2 and use it to create a sprinkler array.
70 Move the cursor to the right into Open 2 as shown, and after the intersection snap displays, click to specify
the copy end point at the ceiling grid intersection.
Next, you array this sprinkler to place multiple sprinklers in the lower section of Open 2. You could copy
sprinklers, but creating an array is quicker.
74 Specify the ceiling grid intersection to the upper-right of the sprinkler as the array start point.
The array is created. Zoom out to display the array. Notice that 4 arrays were created after the end point.
This is because 2nd was selected for Move To on the Options Bar. This indicated that the specified end
point would be the placement location for the second array.
IMPORTANT When specifying array start and end points make certain that the array is placed accurately. Any
misplacement has a multiplier effect as the array propagates. If you make a mistake placing the array, undo the
step and try again. For more information about arrays, refer to Help.
76 While pressing CTRL, select all Open 2 sprinklers except for the far left sprinkler.
79 Specify the array start point at the ceiling grid intersection directly to the upper-left of the left sprinkler
that is within the array selection.
80 Move the cursor directly down along the same vertical ceiling grid, and after the intersection snap displays,
click to specify end point for the second array.
81 In the Revit MEP 2008 dialog, click Delete Element(s) to delete the 3 sprinklers.
Sprinkler placement for the lower section of Open 2 is complete
Next, you place sprinklers in the Mechanical/Electrical room. Because this room does not have a ceiling,
you will use non-hosted sprinklers. However, first, you need to load them in the project.
IMPORTANT A family contains one or more family types (different sizes, and so on) in the RFA (Revit Family)
file. These family types can be selected in the Type Selector or under Families in the Project Browser. Families are
loaded and saved in the current project (dataset). To modify a family type, select an instance of the family type
in the drawing area, click Edit Family on the Options Bar, and then to edit the family in the Family Editor.
85 With the 2-Ceiling Fire Prot view active, enter ZR, and sketch a zoom region around the
Mechanical/Electrical 24 room (located between the Men’s and the Ladies’ rooms).
86 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar, click Sprinkler.
87 In the Type Selector, select M_Sprinkler-Upright-Non_Hosted : 15mm Upright.
88 In the Mechanical/Electrical 24 room, move the cursor toward the right wall, and using the listening
dimensions for reference, click to place a sprinkler 1200 mm from the center of the right wall.
A warning may display informing you that the sprinkler is not visible in the ceiling plan view. You address
this warning after placing the other sprinkler.
89 Move the cursor near the left wall, and notice that the temporary dimensions reference the right wall.
90 Press the Spacebar to change the listening dimension reference to the left wall, and click to place a sprinkler
1200 mm from the center of the left wall.
You can also use the Mirror tool to place the left sprinkler by drawing a mirror axis at the mid point of the
top and bottom walls of the Mechanical/Electrical room.
Notice that the Mechanical/Electrical room sprinklers do not display. This occurred because the sprinkler
offset elevations are beyond the view range of the active ceiling view. Next, you change the sprinkler offsets.
91 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans, and
double-click 2 - Fire Prot to make it the active view.
92 Zoom in on the Mechanical/Electrical room, and while pressing CTRL, select both sprinklers.
94 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter 2900 mm, and click OK.
This specifies the elevation for the selected sprinklers.
95 In the Project Browser, double-click 2 - Ceiling Fire Prot, and notice that the sprinklers display in the
Mechanical/Electrical room.
96 Using the placement methods that you have learned, complete the level 2 sprinkler placement according
to the following criteria and floor plan:
■ Refer to the room schedule to verify the required number of sprinklers for each room. Remember to
always round decimals up to the next whole number.
■ Use sprinkler type: M_Sprinkler-Pendent-Plane_Hosted : 15mm Pendent for all rooms.
NOTE When placing sprinklers, snap to the ceiling grid intersections rather than entering placement dimensions.
Grid snapping ensures accurate placement.
In this exercise, you created a room schedule to calculate the minimum number of sprinklers required for each room
based on the building specifications and the fire protection code. You placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement
IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. Unlike
logical connections (systems), physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. However, piping is
necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing.
Dataset
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans, and
double-click 2 - Fire Prot to make it the active view.
2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window.
3 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar, click System Browser.
TIP You can also press F9 (or click Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. If
the System Browser does not respond, click in the drawing area to make it active, then press F9.
4 Expand the Unassigned folder, and expand the Default Fire Protection Wet system to view the level 2
sprinklers that you placed in the building.
IMPORTANT In the System Browser, all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according
to the system that you assigned to them. You assign a system component (such as mechanical equipment,
sprinklers, and so on) to a system either by creating a logical connection (or system) between the system
components or by assigning a system component to an existing system. All system components that you place
are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. This occurs because each system
component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. So, after
you placed the sprinklers, Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Fire Protection Wet system
category located in the Unassigned folder. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them
to their proper system. As you assign sprinklers to systems, the assigned sprinklers move from the Unassigned
folder to their respective assigned system folder. Thus, if all system components are assigned, a Default system
category would not contain any system components; it would be considered empty. Empty Default system
categories do not display in the System Browser. The System Browser is a powerful tool that allows you to validate
and confirm systems.
Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems.
5 Draw a pick box (from left to right) around the lower half of the building as shown.
Notice that all elements within the 2 - Ceiling Fire Prot view range are selected.
6 On the Options Bar, click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements.
7 In the Filter box, click Check None, select Sprinklers, and click OK.
8 On the Options Bar, click (Create Fire Protection Wet System) to create a fire protection wet system,
and assign the selected sprinklers to it.
Notice that after you click , the system is immediately created and listed in the System Browser. The
wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red. Note that this display indicates that the
new system is selected. It does not indicate a pipe layout path.
IMPORTANT The new system named Fire Protection Wet 1 is now listed in the System Browser under Fire
Protection Wet in the Piping folder. All sprinklers in the system are listed under the system connecting them.
Notice that the Default Fire Protection Wet system category no longer contains these sprinklers because you
have assigned them to a system. After you assign the remaining sprinklers, the default system category will not
contain any sprinklers, and will be considered empty.
Now that the sprinklers are logically connected, you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the
system.
9 In the System Browser, expand Piping, right-click Fire Protection Wet, and click Expand to view the Fire
Protection Wet 1 system listing.
This listing represent the system that you just created.
10 Double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the sprinklers.
You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects
the sprinklers.
IMPORTANT Although you can draw pipe to create the physical pipe connections, you must create a system
for Revit MEP to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. Remember that systems can be created before
or after creating pipe is drawn.
12 With the Fire Protection Wet 1 system selected, click Layout Path on the Options Bar.
The Layout Path tools are provided on the Design Bar and Options Bar.
TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears, place the cursor over a sprinkler, press
Tab, and select the system. You can also right-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 listing in the System Browser, and
click Select to select the system.
NOTE You do not need to select a system or have system components connected to a system to access the
Layout Path tool. After placing a system component, you can a system component to access the Layout Path on
the Options Bar.
13 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar, verify that Solutions is selected.
14 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ For Pipe Type, verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection Wet is selected.
■ For Offset, verify that 2750.0 is specified.
This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2750 mm above level 2.
18 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog, select Branch.
19 Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch.
IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main
and other obstacles. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes, duct, structural beams, or architecture.
20 Click OK.
Next, you modify the layout path.
25 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Layout.
Notice that the pipes are not listed in the System Browser. This is because they constitute a physical rather
than a logical connection, and are not part of the system. You can delete pipes and pipe fittings, and the
system remains.
IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or
pipe sizing. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create the pipe, or
that offset elevations are incorrect. Either relocate the system components, select a different layout solution, or
manually modify the pipe. Always check pipe connectivity after modification.
Next, you modify the pipe run to consolidate the branch lines and simplify the design.
26 In the Project Browser, under Fire Protection ➤ 3D Views, double-click 3D Fire Prot to make it the active
view.
Notice that the cursor snaps to various building elements in the 3D view. You hide these elements to allow
you to easily snap to the sprinklers and the pipe.
27 Enter VG.
29 Click OK.
The building elements are hidden.
30 Zoom in and place the cursor over the branch pipe that services the Office 8 sprinkler, and after it highlights,
press TAB to highlight the branch pipe and sprinkler, and click to select them.
The selected pipe and sprinkler display in red.
31 With the pipe and sprinkler selected, enter ZR, and draw a zoom region around the Office 8 sprinkler.
Remember that although the physical (pipe) connection to the sprinkler has been deleted, the logical
(system) connection is still intact.
Convert a fitting
36 Select the elbow fitting at the end of the branch above the sprinkler.
Notice that 2 plus signs display. These are fitting conversion controls which allow you to convert the elbow
fitting to a tee fitting in either a vertical or horizontal orientation.
You may need to zoom in closer to better see the fitting conversion controls.
IMPORTANT Fitting conversion controls display as plus or minus signs that are located near a selected pipe
fitting. These controls convert the fitting to the next possible fitting type for the piping context. Fitting control
locations indicate the orientation of the fitting connection.
39 Click the minus sign to convert the tee back to the elbow fitting.
40 Select the elbow fitting, and click the left plus sign.
Next, you draw the pipe to connect the Office 8 sprinkler to the branch.
NOTE You must place the cursor over the connector to connect to pipe, pipe fittings, or equipments. When
drawing pipe, use the connector snap, , to quickly and accurately locate a connector. If you pause briefly, a
tooltip appears confirming the connector. When connecting pipe to some elements, such as pipe fittings and
equipment in a 3D view, use the end point snap, , if a connector snap does not display.
43 Using the mouse scroll wheel, zoom out the view so that the tee fitting and the Office 8 sprinkler are visible.
44 Begin to draw the pipe diagonally to the upper-left pipe along the same axis as the existing pipe and toward
the Office 8 sprinkler.
Notice that the pipe diameter is larger than the existing pipe.
TIP When drawing pipe, press the Spacebar after you specify the start point and move the cursor to begin drawing
pipe. This automatically sets the pipe diameter or width and height, and the offset parameter to match those of
the selected connector. If a warning appears informing you that the line is too short, you pressed Spacebar before
you began drawing pipe. Note that the Spacebar does not automatically specify the pipe type. You should always
verify the pipe type from the Type Selector on the Options Bar.
47 Continue to draw the pipe, and as the listening dimensions display, enter 300 and press Enter to specify
the length of the pipe segment.
50 On the Options Bar, click (Connect Into), and select the pipe segment that you just drew.
The sprinkler connects into the pipe. Notice that all pipe fittings are automatically added.
Next, you check the connectivity of the pipe branch to make certain everything is connected and validate
the pipe geometry.
51 In the 3D view, place the cursor over the pipe branch that you modified, and after the pipe segment
highlights, press Tab 3 times.
52 Using the same method, check the connectivity in the 2 -Fire Prot floor plan view.
IMPORTANT Understanding TAB behavior is very important when designing piping systems in Revit MEP. When
pipes and fittings are connected, you can check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of pipe so
that it highlights and then press Tab. The first time you press Tab, the branch to which the pipe is connected
highlights. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected pipe and pipe fittings up to the
first piece of connected equipment. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected pipes,
fittings, and equipment. If the entire network does not highlight, then you know that a disconnect exists. This
disconnect will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. You can repair the connection by dragging
the pipe segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect,
or you can use the Trim (Extend) tool, or you may need to convert a fitting and draw pipe. Typically a disconnect
results from not having sufficient room to make a connection. To use the TAB behavior for selecting highlighted
objects, press TAB the required number of times, and after the objects highlight, click to select them.
After the pipe run and sprinklers highlight, you can click to select them. The lower section of the pipe run
displays in red, allowing you to better see the connections. Next, you validate the piping geometry.
53 In the 3D Fire Prot view, zoom in on the pipe and fittings, and verify that the physical pipe geometry is
as expected.
54 In the Project Browser, under Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans, double-click 2 - Fire Prot to make it the active
view.
55 Zoom the view and draw a pick box (drag left to right) around the upper-right pipe branch (include fittings
and sprinkler) that services Office 28.
58 Place the cursor over the selected pipe run, and after it highlights, right-click, and click Delete.
The pipe branch and fittings are deleted.
65 Press Delete to delete the 2 pipe branches including the pipe fittings. Next, you need to delete the pipes
connected to the upper-right Open 2 sprinklers.
72 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is selected in the Type Selector.
All other pipe properties match those of the selected connector.
73 Zoom the view, and draw the pipe to the right toward the upper-right Office 29 sprinkler, and after the
centerline snap displays, click to specify the first pipe segment end point.
74 Draw the pipe down toward the sprinkler, and after the connector snap displays over the sprinkler, click
to connect to the sprinkler.
77 On the Options Bar, click (Connect Into), and select the pipe segment that you just drew.
The sprinkler connects into the pipe and all pipe fittings are automatically added.
79 Place the cursor over the horizontal pipe branch, and press TAB twice.
However, notice that the 2 sprinklers in Open 2 do not highlight. These sprinklers are not physically
connected. You need to connect these sprinklers.
82 Using the pipe branch modification methods that you learned, connect the 2 lower Office 29 sprinklers
to the pipe branch located on the left.
Remember to delete the end pipe segment before drawing pipe.
83 Place the cursor over the branch that services the lower Office 29 sprinklers, and after it highlights, press
TAB twice, and then click to select the highlighted objects.
These disconnects resulted from deleting the 2 tee fittings that connected the branches to the main. These
branches were deleted during branch consolidation. You need to resolve the disconnects.
TIP After using TAB to check connectivity, you can click to select all highlighted objects. The highlighted objects
display in red, making them easier to view. If you move the cursor, the connection continues to display for easy
reference.
86 Drag the lower pipe connector down over the end of the lower pipe segment, and after the connector snap
displays, release the mouse button to connect the 2 pipe segments.
NOTE Trim/Extend is a 2-click process. First, select the object as the trim/extend start point, then select the
object as the trim/extend end point. Trim/Extend is especially useful in modifying pipe and duct, or in resolving
disconnects. As always, use TAB to check connectivity after making any modifications to pipe.
89 Select the pipe segment above the disconnect as the extend start point.
90 Select the pipe segment below the disconnect as the extend end point.
Next, you tile 2 views and modify the lower end of the pipe run.
94 In the 2 -Fire Prot view, enter ZR, and draw a zoom region around the elbow fitting at the lower end of
the main, including the sprinkler to the right.
95 With the 2 - Fire Prot view active, click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows.
This closes all windows previously opened during the current design session. Note that if this option is
unavailable, the active view is the only open window.
96 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ 3D views, and
double-click 3D Fire Prot to make it the active view.
97 Click Windows menu ➤ Floor Plan : 2 - Fire Prot to make it the active view.
98 Enter WT to tile both windows.
TIP When you tile 2 views, the active view is tiled to the left.
99 Adjust the view in both windows to view the elbow fitting and the left sprinkler as shown.
You will work in the floor plan view and validate the geometry in the 3D view.
Notice that all pipe fittings display in their symbolic representation when you are viewing pipes in coarse
or medium (single line) Detail Level.
100 In the 2 - Fire Prot view, select the elbow, and using the fitting conversion method that you learned earlier,
convert the elbow to a tee with a vertical orientation.
Remember to zoom the view to better see the fitting conversion controls.
Next, you place an endcap on the tee. This endcap will provide pipeline cleanout access. First, you change
the view detail level to display pipes in 2 line.
101 On the View Control Bar located at the lower left of the drawing area, select Fine for Detail Level.
The pipe geometry displays in 2 line.
102 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar, click Pipe Fitting.
103 In the Type Selector, select M_Pipe Endcap : M_Standard.
104 Zoom in on the tee.
105 Move the cursor over the end of the open end of the tee fitting, and after the mid point snap displays, click
to place the endcap.
110 Adjust the floor plan and 3D views to view the sprinkler that is located to the right of the tee and endcap.
111 In the 3D Fire Prot view, draw a pick box around the sprinkler and the connecting pipe branch.
The sprinkler, pipe, and pipe fittings display in red.
116 On the Options Bar, click , and select the right pipe segment above the sprinkler.
The sprinkler connects into the pipe, and all pipe fittings are automatically added.
117 In the 2 - Fire Prot view, zoom in and select the left pipe segment.
118 Drag the right pipe segment connector to the right, and after the connector snap displays, release the
mouse button to reconnect the pipe branch.
You resolved the disconnect. You can validate the geometry in the 3D view.
You will check connectivity later in this exercise. Next, you remove the pipe above Server Room 32.
119 In the 2 - Fire Prot view, zoom out and locate the pipe segment that is above Server Room 32 (located to
the left of Conference Room 31).
The dry fire protection system will service the server room. However, notice that the wet pipe segment is
located over this room. You need to remove this pipe segment to follow good design practice.
120 Select the pipe segment that is above Server Room 32, and press Delete.
121 Enter ZR, and draw a zoom region around the sprinkler that you recently modified.
122 Using the conversion methods that you learned, convert the tee to an elbow.
Remember to zoom the view to locate the fitting conversion control.
This closes the left pipe segment end. You will close the right end when you finish modifying the lower
section of the wet system pipe run.
125 Using the methods that you learned, finish consolidating the branches that service Conference Room 31
(located at the lower-right corner of the building) as shown.
127 If the windows are tiled, close the 3D Fire Prot view, and maximize the 2 - Fire Prot view.
128 In the 2 - Fire Prot view, select a pipe segment, fitting, or sprinkler that is connected to the current wet
system.
Notice that system tools display on the Options Bar.
IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers, air terminals, radiators, mechanical equipment, and so on)
are logically connected by a system, and pipe or duct is created, you can select the pipe or duct, or a system
component to display system tools on the Options Bar. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection).
NOTE Do not click (Select Equipment for System). You use this tool to add mechanical equipment that
is located upstream in a system, such as VAV boxes, boilers, and AC units.
130 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar, click Add To System.
131 On the Options Bar, do the following:
132 Place the cursor outside Office 6 in the upper-left corner of the building.
Notice that the cursor has changed to indicate that Add To System is active.
133 Draw a pick box from upper-left to lower-right around all of the sprinklers that need to be connected.
Do not worry about including sprinklers that are already connected. You cannot select them.
135 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar, click Finish System.
136 In the 2 _Fire Prot view, place the cursor over a newly added sprinkler, and press TAB once to confirm the
upper half of the system.
Notice that the upper section of the system connects to the lower section.
137 With the cursor over the sprinkler, press TAB twice to confirm the entire system.
138 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar, click System Browser.
139 Under Systems, expand Piping, right-click Fire Protection Wet, and click Expand All.
Notice that all of the sprinklers have been assigned to the Fire Protection Wet 1 system. Also notice that
the Unassigned folder is not listed. This is because you assigned all of the sprinklers that you had placed
to a system.
The newly added sprinklers are logically connected. Next, you physically connect these sprinklers with
piping.
NOTE Remember that when you confirm systems, you are confirming the logical connection between system
elements, not piping which is the physical connection.
141 Click Modify on the Design Bar, and select a newly added sprinkler.
TIP You do not need to select a system or have system elements (such as sprinklers) logically connected to a
system to access the Layout Path tool. After placing system components, select any system component to access
Layout Path on the Options Bar.
143 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar, verify that Solutions is selected.
144 On the Options Bar, do the following:
Notice that the main connects to the open end of the cross fitting. Next, you verify the pipe conversion
settings that you use to convert the layout path to a physical pipe run.
146 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog, verify that Main is selected.
147 Under System Type: Fire Protection Wet, do the following:
■ For Pipe Type, verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection Wet is selected.
■ For Offset, verify that 2750.0 is specified.
This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2750 mm above level 2.
148 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog, select Branch.
149 Verify that the pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch as for Main.
150 Click OK.
151 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Layout.
If a No auto-route solution found warning displays after you create the pipe run, this is because the pipe
run (most likely the main) is disconnected. You will resolve these disconnects when you consolidate the
branches.
Next, you complete the pipe run.
152 Using the methods that you learned on the lower pipe run, modify the upper pipe run to consolidate the
branches and simplify the piping design according to the following criteria and floor plan:
153 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save.
154 In the Save As dialog, enter Connecting the Sprinklers Training for File name, navigate to the folder
of your choice, and click Save.
In this exercise, you created a system to logically connect the sprinklers. You confirmed the system and the assigned
sprinklers in the System Browser. After creating the system, you created piping to physically connect the sprinklers.
Connectivity was checked, and pipe geometry was confirmed in the 3D view. You also converted pipe fittings and
placed endcap fittings. Finally, you used various methods to modify pipe segments to bring the system design more in
line with the specifications. In the next exercise, you create the dry fire protection system.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans, and
double-click 2 - Ceiling Fire Prot to make the view active.
Place sprinklers
2 Enter ZR, and draw a zoom region around Server Room 32.
6 Move the cursor to the upper-left corner directly above the sprinkler, and after the ceiling grid intersection
snap displays, click to specify the copy start point.
7 Move the cursor to the right along the same horizontal ceiling grid and into the Server Room 32, and after
the ceiling grid intersection snap displays, click to specify the copy end point for the first sprinkler.
8 Move the cursor diagonally to the upper-left, and after the intersection snap displays, click to specify the
copy end point for the second sprinkler.
TIP If you have difficulty displaying an intersection snap because of other snaps interfering, you can enter SI to
override all other snaps and display only intersection snaps. Note that snap overrides deactivate after you make
a selection. You can also turn off snaps in the Snaps dialog (click Settings menu ➤ Snaps).
12 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar, click System Browser.
The System Browser opens.
13 Under Systems, Expand Unassigned to view the 2 dry sprinklers that you placed.
14 In the drawing area, while pressing CTRL, select both sprinklers.
Notice that after you click , the dry system is immediately created and listed in the System Browser.
The dry system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red.
Remember that this display indicates that the new system is selected. It does not indicate a pipe layout
path.
IMPORTANT The new system named Fire Protection Dry 1 is now listed in the System Browser under Fire
Protection Dry in the Piping folder. All sprinklers in the system are listed under the system connecting them.
Notice that the Default Fire Protection Dry system category no longer displays. This indicates that you have
assigned all of the dry sprinklers to a system, and the Default Fire Protection Dry system category is considered
empty.
The sprinklers are logically connected. Next, you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system.
18 Expand Fire Protection Dry 1, and for each sprinkler, right-click, and click Select.
Each selected sprinkler displays in red. In the System Browser, you can view system information including
flow, sprinkler size, and so on. You have confirmed and validated the system. Next, you create the pipe
run to physically connect the sprinklers.
19 In the Project Browser, double-click 2 - Fire Prot to make it the active view.
20 Zoom in on Server Room 32.
21 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar, click Pipe.
22 In the Type Selector, select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Dry.
23 On the Options Bar, do the following:
26 Place the cursor outside Office 33 and over the vertical main pipe that services the wet system, and after
the intersection snap displays, click to specify the start point for the first pipe segment.
30 On the Options Bar, click , and select the pipe segment above the sprinkler.
31 Zoom the view, and select each pipe segment to verify the slope.
Notice that the slope displays next to the slope control. You can click the slope control to change the slope
direction. To follow good design practice, the pipe is sloped toward the main for drainage purposes.
Next, you check connectivity and validate the pipe geometry.
32 In the Project Browser, under Fire Protection, expand 3D views, and double-click 3D Fire Prot.
33 Zoom in on Server Room 32.
34 Place the cursor over a pipe segment, and press TAB 3 times.
The dry system pipe run and the wet system pipe run highlight, indicating that they are connected.
IMPORTANT When drawing pipe either by using the Pipe draw tool on the Design Bar, or by right-clicking a
connector, always verify that the pipe type is correct in the Type Selector. However, if you use the Create Similar
tool, , then all connector parameters and the type of the selected object are matched. This eliminates the
need to verify the type in the Type Selector each time you create pipe.
43 In the Save As dialog, enter Creating the Dry System Training for File name, navigate to the folder
of your choice, and click Save.
In this exercise, you created the fire protection dry system that services Server Room 32. First, you placed dry system
sprinklers. Then, you created the dry system and a pipe run to logically and physically connect the sprinklers. After
the system was completed, you connected the fire protection pipe run to the supply pipe that provides water to the
fire protection system. Additionally, you confirmed the systems in the System Browser, checked pipe connectivity, and
validated the pipe geometry in the 3D view.
Define columns
3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select Count, and click Add.
This adds the Count field to the list of scheduled fields to include in the schedule. Scheduled fields display
as columns in the schedule.
4 Under Available fields, select Family and Type, and click Add to add the field to the list.
5 Select a field, and use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to arrange the Scheduled fields list as follows:
■ Count
■ Family and Type
Next, you specify how the data will be organized in the schedule.
A new view called Sprinkler Schedule opens and is located under Schedules/Quantities in the Project
Browser. Notice that only the data for the level 2 sprinklers displays, and that it is sorted according to
family and type. You may need to drag the column dividers to modify the column width. There is a grand
total of 68 sprinklers on level 2. You can refer to this sprinkler total as you modify the pipe diameters in
order to satisfy the design and code requirements.
Next, you tile the floor plan and 3D views.
7 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ 3D views, and
double-click 3D Fire Prot to make the view active.
8 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows.
This closes all windows previously opened during the current design session. Note that this option is not
available if the active view is the only open window.
9 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans, and
double-click 2- Fire Prot to make the view active.
10 Enter WT to tile both windows.
TIP When you tile 2 views, the active view is tiled to the left.
11 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown.
You will work mainly in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view. Next, you
modify the pipe diameters.
12 In the 2- Fire Prot view, starting at the upper-left corner of the building, draw a pick box around the entire
level 2 fire protection pipe run.
15 Click in the 3D Fire Prot view to make it active, and while pressing SHIFT, select the supply pipe in the
stairwell to remove it from the selection.
17 Select any pipe segment and verify the 25mm diameter on the Options Bar.
18 Place the cursor over a pipe segment, and press TAB twice.
The entire fire protection pipe run highlights, verifying that it is connected.
19 In the 2 -Fire Prot view, draw a narrow pick box around the main pipe.
20 With the main selected, while pressing CTRL, draw a pick box around the horizontal main, the pipe fittings,
and the supply pipe.
24 In the 3D view, select the supply pipe, and on the Options Bar, verify that the diameter is 150mm.
25 Validate the pipe run geometry, especially around the pipe fittings.
Notice that some branch pipe segments service more than 2 sprinklers. You need to change the diameters
of these segments to conform to the code requirements.
28 Select the first pipe segment that services Conference Room 31 and directly connects to the main.
32 Place the cursor over the pipe segment that connects the conference room sprinklers to the Open 2 sprinkler,
press TAB twice to highlight the pipe segments and fittings, and click to select them.
The pipe segments including the elbow and 2 tee fittings display in red. You can verify this selection in
the 3D view.
33 On the Options Bar, for D:, select 40mm to comply with the design criteria.
The rest of this pipe branch services 2 sprinklers. The 25mm pipe diameter complies with the design criteria.
Later in this exercise, you will complete the branch diameter modification. Next, you tag some of the pipes
enabling you to identify their diameters.
34 In the 2 - Fire Prot view, zoom in on the branch that you modified.
35 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar, click Tag ➤ By Category.
36 On the Options Bar, do the following:
37 In the Tag dialog, under Category, for Pipes, verify that M_Pipe Size Tag is loaded.
38 Click OK.
39 Place the cursor over the left pipe segment that connects the conference room branch to the main, and
after the segment highlights, click to place the tag.
Notice that an outline of the tag displays and follows the cursor for accurate placement.
42 Click the tag to display end controls (blue dots) and horizontal controls (arrows).
43 Drag the horizontal control to the upper-left to relocate the tag.
Next, you finish modifying the pipe run diameters, and finish placing the pipe tags.
44 Using the methods that you learned in this exercise, finish modifying pipe run diameters according to the
following criteria, and finish tagging the pipes.
1, 2 25mm
3 32mm
4, 5 40mm
6-10 50mm
45 In the Save As dialog, enter Modifying Pipe Diameter Training for File name, navigate to the folder
of your choice, and click Save.
In this exercise, you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. The pipe
run now complies with the design criteria. You learned the difference between pipe sizing and manually changing the
diameter of a pipe. Finally, you tagged the pipes, allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters.
In the lesson, you created a wet and a dry fire protection system consisting of sprinklers and piping. You validated rigid
pipe connections and geometry using a floor plan and the 3D view. Finally, you confirmed the logical systems using
the System Browser. This completes the Designing Fire Protection Systems lesson.
For additional practice, use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet and dry systems.
Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2.
In this tutorial, you created a wet and a dry fire protection system. Although the creation and modification methods
remained the same, each system was completely different. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical
pipe connections and creating logical systems, and sizing as opposed to manually modifying a pipe diameter. The
completed fire protection system is included in the m Completed Fire Protection System.rvt file located in the
Metric ➤ Fire Protection folder under Training Files. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection
systems. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP.
in Revit MEP 2008. We wish to thank BNIM Architects, a Kansas city based
architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use
Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District, the Freighthouse Flats
urban luxury loft living spaces. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the
ceilings, balconies, and a roof garden. As the building is slated to receive historic
tax credits, the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. The
additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include
a 4th floor penthouse, exterior fire stairs, and north facing balconies for the 2nd
419
NOTE For training purposes, slight modifications to the building design have been made.
■ Create new project views, including plan, elevation, section, and detail views
■ Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans
■ Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation
effects
■ Create projects sheets that contain project views
421
Creating Views
In this lesson, you learn how to create views from a building model. You learn how to create new views from existing
views, how to create section and elevation views, and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views.
Dataset
10 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.
11 Under Floor Plans, right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename.
12 In the Rename View dialog, enter Vicinity Plan, and click OK.
13 In the Project Browser, double-click Vicinity Plan.
14 On the View Control Bar, click the current scale, and click 1: 1000.
Next, hide the display of the elevation markers in the view.
Section view
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.rvt.
NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry.
6 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed.
7 Select and move the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of
the building.
9 In the Project Browser, under Elevations (Building Elevation), right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename.
10 In the Rename View dialog, enter South East, and click OK.
11 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South East.
12 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.
13 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Section.
14 In the Type Selector, select Section: Building Section.
15 On the Options Bar, for Scale, select 1:100.
16 Draw a section line through the building:
■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3.
■ Move the cursor down, and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2
and 3.
17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through
the building.
19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section
head to the section line endpoint.
22 In the Project Browser, expand Sections (Building Section), and double-click Section 1.
23 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium.
24 Select gridline F, select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble, and drag the top segment
of gridline F to the right.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.rvt.
■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair, and specify a point to complete the callout.
■ On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the callout boundary.
■ Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head, and move it to the left side of the
callout boundary.
■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building, and specify a point above and to the right of the roof
overhang.
■ Move the cursor diagonally down, and specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang.
17 In the Project Browser, expand Detail Views (Details), and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename.
18 In the Rename View dialog, enter Roof Overhang Detail, and click OK.
19 In the Project Browser, under Detail Views (Details), double-click Roof Overhang Detail.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.rvt.
24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing, and on the Options Bar, click .
25 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
26 In the Type Properties dialog, for Elevation Tag, select 12.5mm Square.
27 Click OK twice.
On the floor plan, notice the square elevation markers that display.
36 In the drawing, select the callout, and on the Options Bar, click .
37 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
38 In the Type Properties dialog, for Callout Tag, select , Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius.
39 Click OK twice.
40 Press ESC.
The custom callout head displays on the floor plan.
Presentation view
Dataset
2 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view.
The crop region displays as red, and features blue triangular grips and break marks.
4 On the Design Bar, click Modify to hide the crop region grips and display it as black.
5 On the View Toolbar, click Zoom to Fit.
6 On the Project Browser, under Elevations, right-click East, and click Properties.
7 In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, clear Crop Region Visible.
8 Click OK.
■ Callouts
■ Elevations
■ Grids
■ Levels
■ Sections
16 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, right-click East, and click Create View Template From View.
17 In the New View Template dialog, enter Black and White Presentation Elevation, and click OK.
18 In the View Templates dialog, click OK.
19 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click North.
20 In the Project Browser, right-click North, and click Apply View Template.
21 In the Select View Template dialog, select Black and White Presentation Elevation, click Apply, and click
OK.
The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view.
■ Under Primary Range, for Bottom, select Level Below (Level 4).
■ Under View Depth, for Level, select Level Below (Level 4).
■ Click OK twice.
NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view.
6 In the Project Browser, select Roof Plan, right-click, and click Properties.
7 In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, for View Range, click Edit.
8 In the View Range dialog:
NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan
Region.
■ In the left corner of the building, select the left endpoint of the outer wall.
■ Move you cursor diagonally, and select the endpoint the gridline shown below.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress.rvt.
1 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.
2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.
3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Filters tab.
4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click Edit/New.
9 Click OK.
10 On the Filter tab, click Add.
11 Select Rated Walls, and click OK.
12 On the Filter tab, for Rated Walls, under Projection/Surface, click Override under Patterns.
13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog, for Color, click No Override.
14 In the Color dialog, under Basic colors, select the red color, and click OK.
15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog, for Pattern, select Solid Fill.
16 Click OK.
17 Using the same method, apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well.
18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog, click OK.
The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the
drawing at any time, but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress.rvt.
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.
2 Select Copy of Level 1, right-click, and click Rename.
3 In the Rename View dialog, enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1, and click OK.
4 On the View Control Bar, click Show Crop Region.
5 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit.
6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left, as shown.
9 On the View Control Bar, click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region.
Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown
NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region.
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1, and click Duplicate
View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing.
2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1, right-click, and click Rename.
3 In the Rename View dialog, enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1, and click OK.
4 On the View Control Bar, click the current scale, and click 1: 50.
5 Select the diagonal bottom wall, right-click, and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category.
6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog, under Visibility, select Walls.
7 Under Cut, click in the Patterns field, and click Override.
8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog, under Pattern Overrides, for Color, click No Override.
9 On the left side of the Color dialog, click black, and click OK.
10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog, for Pattern, select Solid fill.
11 Click OK twice.
19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown.
26 On the floor plan, select the sofa, right-click, and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element.
27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog, click Projection Lines.
28 For Color, click By Category Override.
29 In the Color dialog, select a bright green color, and click OK twice.
32 Select one of the lamps, right-click, and click Unhide in view ➤ Category.
Dataset
TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar, right-click, and click View.
The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. The text fields
in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters
with the appropriate text fields.
NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every
time the project file is saved.
4 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the title block.
5 When the title block highlights, on the Options Bar, click (Properties).
6 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data:
12 Click OK.
13 In the Element Properties dialog, continue to add project information:
14 Click OK.
The new project information displays in the titleblock.
19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps, create the following new project sheets:
■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating
Sheets_in_progress.rvt.
Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan
1 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A102 - Floor Plan.
2 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, select Level 1, and drag it to the sheet.
3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet, and
click to place the view.
The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet.
7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet, align it with the East elevation, and click
to place it.
8 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet, and on the Options Bar, click .
14 In the Element Properties dialog, for View Scale, select 1:5, and click OK.
15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view.
Notice the title bar also needs to be resized.
16 Select title bar, and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view.
Dataset
■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating
Sheets_in_progress.rvt.
■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating
Sheets_in_progress.rvt.
10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building.
11 On the View Control Bar, click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on.
12 On the View Control Bar, click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region.
19 Select the view on the sheet, and on the Options Bar, click .
20 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
21 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate.
22 In the Name dialog, enter Viewport/no title mark, and click OK.
23 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Show title, select No.
24 Click OK twice.
25 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
The title bar no longer displays on the sheet.
such as doors and windows. You also learn to create different types of schedules,
such as room and window schedules, in your Revit MEP 2008 projects.
469
Tagging Objects
In this lesson, you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit MEP. You learn how to
3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar, click Room Separation.
Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms.
NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Room
and Area.
5 Use the same method to create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right,
as shown:
6 Use the same method to create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the
living area.
12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar, click Room.
13 On the Options Bar, verify that Tag on placement is selected.
14 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view, and click to place the room and tag.
The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged, and the rectangle contains the room tag.
15 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the room tag.
The room tag number displays in blue, indicating that it can be edited.
17 Click the room text label, enter Entry, and press ENTER.
25 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2.
26 On the Design Bar, click Room Tag.
The rooms are already placed, but they need to be tagged.
27 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair), and moving clockwise, click to place a room tag in each of
the 5 rooms.
28 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
■ Entry door
■ Kitchen pantry door
■ Pocket door in toilet
■ Closet door in dining room
■ Living room door
7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left, and on the Options Bar, click (Properties).
8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identify Data, for Mark, enter U18-2, and click OK.
10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right, and drag it down to center it in the doorway.
11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door.
9 Click Modify.
11 Select the tag for the table, and drag it above the chair tag.
12 Click the elbow control, and drag it up to form an angled leader.
13 Optionally, modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs.
14 Click Modify.
15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1), and on the Options Bar, clear Leader.
17 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2.
18 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged, select M_Furniture tag : Standard, and click OK.
All furniture in the floor plan is tagged.
19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture.
You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building
model.
Next, you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. Finally, you change the window instance schedule to
a type schedule, in which windows are listed by window type.
Dataset
TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View.
7 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule:
■ Count
■ Height
■ Level
■ Type Mark
■ Width
8 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking
Move Up or Move Down.
9 Click OK.
10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark, and on the Options Bar, click Show.
If no open view shows the selected element, you are prompted to open one that does.
11 If the confirmation dialog displays, click OK to search through relevant views of the building model.
The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the
building model.
NOTE By clicking Show, you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window.
However, in large building models with many views, this can be a time-consuming process.
13 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule to
redisplay the window instance schedule.
14 In the drawing area, right-click the schedule, and click View Properties.
15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit.
16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, for Sort by, select Type Mark, and click OK
twice.
17 In the window schedule, change the Type Mark in the first row from 19 to A, and press ENTER.
18 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type.
The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted.
23 Change the Type Mark for the other window types, so that the types are sequentially named from A to H,
as shown:
26 Click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color
Diagrams_in_progress.rvt.
Dataset
Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color
Diagrams_in_progress.rvt.
■ Under Categories, select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category.
■ Under Parameter Data, for Name, enter Head Detail.
■ For Group parameter under, select Construction.
■ For Discipline, select Type.
5 Click OK.
The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog.
6 Use the same method to create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail.
7 In the Parameter Properties dialog, click OK.
8 In the Project Browser, right-click Building Window Schedule, and click Properties.
9 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit.
10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select the following fields, and
click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ Head Detail
■ Jamb Detail
■ Sill Detail
11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list, so that they are listed before Comments.
12 Click OK twice.
13 In the schedule, select Head Detail, Jamb Detail, and Sill Detail.
TIP To select all 3 headers, click in the Head Detail header, and while pressing the left mouse button, move the
cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers.
4 Click OK.
5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab.
6 Under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ Count
■ Family and Type
■ Head Height
■ Sill Height
■ Width
■ Mark
7 Click the Filter tab, and specify the following values for Filter by:
This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with, and produces a schedule
that includes only the doors in Unit 18.
12 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all), and double-click A102 - Unit 18.
13 In the Project Browser, click Unit 18 - Door Schedule, and drag it to the sheet.
NOTE In some cases in this tutorial, partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes.
Dataset
Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color
Diagrams_in_progress.rvt.
TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View.
3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Rooms, and click OK.
4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select Number, and click Add.
The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields.
5 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule in order:
■ Name
■ Level
■ Area
■ In the schedule, for room 101, for Name, enter Building Entry, and press ENTER.
■ For 102, enter Storage, and press ENTER.
■ For 103, enter Corridor, and press ENTER.
■ For 104, select Corridor.
■ For 105, select Storage.
■ In the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog, under Visibility/Graphics Overrides,
expand Lines.
■ For Room Separation, under Projection/Surface, click the Lines field.
■ In the Lines field, click Override.
■ In the Line Graphics dialog, click the Color field.
■ Under Custom colors, click the bright green swatch, and click OK.
■ For Weight, select 9, and click OK.
4 Click OK.
Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line.
18 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1, and zoom in to the Corridor.
32 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, right-click Room Schedule, and click Properties.
33 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit.
34 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available fields, click Room Style, and click Add.
35 Click OK twice.
36 In the Project Browser, double-click Room Schedule.
The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule.
All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. The Room Style specification will be used later to
determine color fill in a room color diagram.
Dataset
Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color
Diagrams_in_progress.rvt.
14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Color Scheme Legend.
A legend displays at the tip of the cursor.
15 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend.
16 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
24 Click OK.
25 With the legend still selected, on the Options Bar, click (Properties).
26 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
27 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Swatch Width, enter 25 mm.
28 Under Title Text, for Size, enter 5 mm, and click OK twice.
4 In the Type Selector, select Basic Roof : Wood Joist - Insulation on Plywood Deck - EPDM.
5 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff.
7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog, under Category, select Roofs, and click OK.
8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog, under Available fields, click Family and Type,
and click Add.
9 Using the same method, add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields.
10 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab, and specify the following values:
12 Click OK.
The Roof Materials Takeoff Schedule displays.
14 In the Project Browser, right-click Roof Material Takeoff, and click Properties.
15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit.
16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog, under Available fields, click Material: Cost, and click Add.
17 Click Calculated Value.
18 In the Calculated Value dialog, for Name, enter Estimated Cost.
19 For Formula, enter Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1000mm^2).
The /(1000mm^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so the cost estimate value can be
calculated.
20 Click OK.
21 Click the Formatting tab, and under Fields, click Estimated Cost.
22 For Field formatting, select Calculate totals, and click OK twice.
23 In the Material Takeoff, for the Material: Cost field, enter the following values:
EPDM 16
Plywood 13.40
24 In the Project Browser, right-click Roof Material Takeoff, and click Properties.
28 Click OK 3 times.
NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects.
28 Select the Note in the upper-left area of the drawing window, and press DELETE.
6 Move the cursor to the right, and click in the center of the corridor, above the exterior door as shown.
13 While pressing CTRL, select the 2 dashed travel lines, and click (Properties).
14 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Path ID, enter 1-1, and click OK.
15 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double click Exiting Plan - Level 2.
16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Component.
17 On the Options Bar, verify that Chain is selected.
28 While pressing CTRL, select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path, and click (Properties).
29 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Path ID, enter 2-1, and click OK.
30 Use the same method to specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2.
43 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, right-click Level 1 Exit Distance, and click Duplicate
View ➤ Duplicate.
44 In the Project Browser, right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance, and click Rename.
45 In the Rename View dialog, enter Level 2 Exit Distance, and click OK.
46 In the Project Browser, right-click Level 2 Exit Distance, and click Properties.
47 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Filter, click Edit.
48 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Filter by, in the third field, enter 2-, and click OK twice.
The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays.
TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click the Design Bar, and click View.
■ Area
■ Volume
■ Width
■ Length
■ Assembly Code
■ Assembly Description
6 In the Project Browser, expand Families\Walls\Basic Wall, right-click Generic - 152 mm, and click Properties.
7 In the Type Properties dialog, for Assembly Code, click the Value field, and click the browse button.
8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog, expand C - Interiors\C10 - Interior Construction\C1010 -
Partitions\C1010100 - Fixed Partitions, click C1010145 - Partitions - Drywall w/ Metal Stud, and click OK
twice.
519
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project
In this lesson, you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project, as the base elevation of most projects is rarely
at 0 mm. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project,
or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. You accomplish this in Revit MEP by
defining levels as either project or shared levels.
Dataset
■ Click Duplicate.
■ In the Name dialog, enter8 mm Head - Shared Elevation, and click OK.
■ Under Constraints, for Elevation Base, select Shared.
6 Click OK twice.
9 Move the cursor above the elevation line, enter 10000 mm, and press ENTER.
By entering 10000 mm in this step, you specify the new location of the project.
■ Press and hold CTRL, and select Levels 2-4, the Penthouse level, and the Roof Plan level.
■ In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation.
■ On the Design Bar, click Modify.
All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation.
Dimensioning
In this lesson, you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. In Revit
MEP, there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. Temporary dimensions display automatically when
you create and insert components. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created, except when you sketch profiles
to complete families. In this case, permanent dimensions are created automatically, although you must turn on their
visibility to view them.
Creating Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit MEP to dimension and space planter
boxes on the north side of the building. You place linear, multi-segmented, radial, and angular dimensions, and learn
to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt
Dimensioning | 525
2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension.
The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. By default, dimensions are aligned, snap to
wall centerlines, and are created by selecting individual reference points.
3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view, and when a green dashed line displays
along the left side of the curtain, select it.
4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view, and when a green dashed line
displays along the right side of the curtain wall, select it.
6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension.
The lock displays as locked, indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls
without first unlocking the dimension. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained
in this way.
12
13 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall Faces.
14 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select its left exterior face.
15 Move the cursor to the right, and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters.
16 After you select the reference points on the final planter, select the right side of the curtain wall.
17 Move the cursor up, above the plan view of the building, but below the first dimension that you placed,
and click to place the multi-segmented dimension.
Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances
18 With the multi-segmented dimension selected, click to make all the dimension segments equal and
reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another.
■ Click (Radial).
■ For Prefer, select Wall faces.
23 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights, and select it.
24 Move the cursor outside the wall, and specify a point to place the dimension.
25 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.
■ Click (Angular).
■ For Prefer, verify Wall faces is selected.
36 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc, and click to place the dimension.
37 On the Basics tab, click Modify.
38 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions” on page 531.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt
6 Move the cursor down below the plan view, and click to place the automatic dimension string.
6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights, and select it.
7 Using the same method, select the right edge of the planter, move the cursor down, and click to place the
dimension.
15 Moving the cursor to the right, select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls, and click
to place the dimension.
16 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall
17 Select the dimension that you just placed, and zoom in on the right end of the dimension.
18 Press and hold SHIFT, select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark, and drag the
dimension down the wall.
20 Release SHIFT, and click the blue middle grip until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition
wall.
21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan, and using the same methods, create a witness line
gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall.
22 On the Basics tab, click Modify.
23 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions” on
page 537.
Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt
2 Click (Properties).
3 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
4 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate.
5 In the Name dialog, enter Office Standard, and click OK.
■ Click OK twice.
8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select the bottom dimension.
Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type
18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter.
19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter.
20 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders, and click .
22 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
23 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ Click Rename.
■ In the Rename dialog, for New, enter Standard Notes, and click OK.
■ Under Text, for Text font, select CityBlueprint.
■ Under Graphics, for Leader Arrowhead, select Arrow 30 Degree.
■ Click OK twice.
29 Move the cursor up and to the right, over the Planting Bed text.
30 When green dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text, click to place the text box.
32 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name.
33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.
represent materials like lumber, plywood, and metal studs. These components
display at the required scale. For a detail that you do not want to associate with
the model, like a standard door header condition, you use a separate drafting view
in which to create the detail. The "drafted" detail that you create is not
547
Creating a Detail from a Building Model
In this lesson, you detail the roof overhang of a project building.
In order to detail from the building model, you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. You define
that view by creating a callout view within a section view. In the callout view, you trace over the building model
geometry, add detail components, and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes.
NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents.
■ Select the corrugated metal component, and on the Edit toolbar, click (Move).
■ Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point.
■ Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point.
■ Click Modify.
21 Select the original instance of the corrugated metal component, and press DELETE.
TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood.
Because you still have several components to load, you load them as a group from a single file.
34 In the Type Selector, select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 200mm Nominal, and place it in the
detail view as shown.
38 Click Modify.
39 Select the horizontal segment, click the Flip instance arrows, and click Modify.
The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist.
NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification.
Add insulation
43 Click Modify.
44 Move the upper segment:
■ Select the upper segment of insulation, and on the Edit toolbar, click (Move).
■ Select the left midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move start point.
■ Select the right midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move end point.
■ Click Modify.
52 Click Modify.
53 Proceed to the next exercise, “Adding Detail Lines” on page 554.
4 Click Modify.
5 Select the vertical plywood component; drag the endpoint up to the top of the 50 x 200mm component.
9 Select the lines at the top of the 50 x 300mm component and the roof joist, as shown.
Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result.
16 On the Options Bar, select Chain, and draw the detail lines as shown.
21 In the drawing area, select the Penthouse level line, right-click, and click Hide in view ➤ Elements.
22 In the Project Browser, under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail), right-click Roof Overhang Detail, and click
Properties.
23 In the Element Properties dialog, for Graphics ➤ Display Model, select Do not display, and click OK.
When you turn the display model off, the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in
this view. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added.
28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard, and then select the interior edge of
the horizontal segment.
TIP To rotate the break line as you place it, press SPACEBAR as necessary.
32 Click Modify.
33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask, select the
break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it.
34 Proceed to the next exercise, “Adding Text Notes” on page 558.
6 Click Modify.
4 In the drawing area, select a text note, right-click, click Select All Instances, and press DELETE.
5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail; on the Options Bar, click (Filter Selection).
6 In the Filter dialog, clear Detail Items and Dimensions, and click OK.
The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote.
7 Click Modify.
8 Zoom in to the metal coping; while pressing CTRL, select all the coping linework.
You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment, pressing TAB, and selecting the chain.
14 Click Modify.
15 Use a window to select all linework; in the Type Selector, select Medium Lines.
16 Click Modify.
17 Click File menu ➤ Save As.
18 In the Save As dialog, navigate to your preferred location; for File name, enter Roof Edge, and click Save.
19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Load into Projects.
The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail, and the component can be placed in the
detail.
NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail - Keynotes view is not the open view, double-click it in the Project Browser.
Adding Keynotes
In this exercise, you place keynotes on objects, and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated
with them.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.rvt.
■ In the drawing area, select the rigid insulation as the object to tag.
■ Click to place the leader arm.
■ Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag.
■ In the Keynotes dialog, navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210.B5, 63mm Rigid Insulation, and
click OK.
6 Click Modify.
7 In the drawing area, select the metal fascia with drip edge, and click (Properties).
8 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
9 In the Type Properties dialog, for Identity Data ➤ Keynote, click in the Value column.
10 In the Keynotes dialog, navigate to 07645.F1, FasciaProfile_1.
11 Click OK 3 times.
12 On the Design Bar, click Keynote ➤ Element.
13 Tag components:
17 Keynote the component, using keynote 07460.A8, 22mm Corrugated Steel - 20 Ga.
18 Save the file.
19 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating Line-based Detail Components” on page 564.
10 In the drawing area, select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown.
40 Click Modify.
Add keynotes
■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460.A9, and press ENTER.
■ Enter 07463.A1, and press TAB.
■ Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit, and press TAB.
■ Enter 07460.
3 In the text editor, click File menu ➤ Save, and close the text editor.
13 Click Modify.
14 Save the file.
6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail), right-click Drafting 1, and click
Rename.
7 In the Rename View dialog, enter EPDM Metal Coping, and click OK.
8 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a Reference Callout” on page 570.
5 Click Modify.
6 Select the callout, and use the callout grips to move the callout head.
7 In the Project Browser, right-click EPDM Metal Coping, and click Properties.
8 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
9 In the Type Properties dialog, click Rename.
10 In the Rename dialog, for New, enter Detail - No Reference, and click OK.
11 In the Type Properties dialog, for Graphics ➤ Reference Label, delete the existing value.
12 Click OK twice.
The callout head no longer displays a reference label.
14 In the Project Browser, under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all), double-click A105 - Elev./Sect./Det.
15 Under Drafting Views (Detail - No Reference), drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet.
16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view.
17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail.
The callout is updated with the sheet information.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.rvt.
16 Select the left edge of the region, select the width dimension, and enter 20.5mm.
17 Click Modify.
18 While pressing CTRL, select the left and bottom edges of the region.
19 In the Type Selector, select Wide Lines.
21 Select the filled region, and on the Edit toolbar, click (Mirror).
24 Select the mirrored region, and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 50 x 150.
35 Select all the linework for the wood region; in the Type Selector, select Medium Lines.
36 Align the wood region to the 50 x 150:
■ Click (Pick).
■ For Offset, enter 6mm, and press ENTER.
45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it.
You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it.
■ Click (Draw).
■ For Offset, enter 0, and press ENTER.
■ Select Chain.
60 Select the left, top, and right edges of the door panel region.
61 Click Modify.
62 Select the left detail line, select the height dimension, enter 76.2mm, and press ENTER.
63 Repeat for the right detail line.
68 Click Modify.
69 Select the bolt; drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line.
NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail; use the images as
a guide.
74 Select the expansion bolt; drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the
50 x 150.
94 Select the mirrored line on the right, select the length dimension, enter 3mm, and press ENTER.
95 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines.
96 Beginning at the end of the 3mm line, draw a line up to the height of the other detail line.
TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements.
Add dimensions
110 Select the dimension line; using the Drag Text grip, drag the text for the smaller dimension.
115 Select the note, and on the Options Bar, click (Add Right Arc Leader).
116 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region.
documentation, including:
587
Using Note Blocks
In this lesson, you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building.
19 On the toolbar, click (Mirror), and on the Options Bar, clear Copy.
20 Select the tag on the left, and click to create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward
the building, as shown:
NOTE To create a vertical mirror image, position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays,
and click.
Tag Text
B Repair existing door surround. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements.
E Remove all existing windows. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation.
H Saw cut existing brick wall. Clean cut and repair wall as required.
■ On the Fields tab, under Available fields, select Tag, and click Add.
■ Select Text, and click Add.
■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Tag.
26 Click OK.
The Exterior Construction Notes block displays.
30 Click to place the block in the upper-left corner of the sheet, and drag the right column control to expand
the column to display the note text.
31 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
32 Zoom in to see the note block.
■ On the Fields tab, under Available fields, select Sheet Number, and click Add.
■ Select Sheet Name, and click Add.
■ On the Filter tab, for Filter by, in the first field, select Sheet Number, in the second field, select does
not equal, and in the third field, enter T.
■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Sheet Number.
4 Click OK.
The drawing list displays.
Using Legends
Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. The two
most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component
legends.
Annotation legends are made up of components such as section markers and door tags that are paired with text that
identifies them. On construction documents, annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends.
Building component legends list and identify components such as walls, windows, doors, and door frames. On
construction documents, building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule, door frame
schedule, and so on).
NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit MEP
building model, and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block.
11 In the Type Selector, verify that Text : Legend Text is selected, and click to the right of the first symbol to
specify the text start point.
12 Enter Detail Callout for the text note.
13 Working from the top down, enter the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend:
■ Level Indicator
■ Door Tag
■ Window Tag
14 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all), and double-click A101 - Site Plan/Floor Plan.
15 In the Project Browser, expand Legends, click Typical Symbol Legend, drag it to the lower-right corner of
the sheet, and click to place it.
■ For Family, select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider.
■ For View, select Section.
■ For Host length, enter 900 mm, and press ENTER.
NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line, for example to force a line break between ''Wall
Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider.''
15 Click below the lower wall and enter Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall.
20 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component.
21 In the Project Browser, right-click Sheets (all), and click New Sheet.
22 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK to accept the default titleblock.
23 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, select Level 4, and drag it to the new sheet.
24 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet.
25 In the Project Browser, under Legends, select 4th Floor Wall Types, drag it onto the sheet, and click to place
it in the upper left corner of the sheet.
37 Optionally, click if you do not want to save the change to the wall type.
38 Click File menu ➤ Save.
Modify a wall
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 4.
2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider.
8 In the drawing area, click near the partition you moved, and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment
of the revision cloud.
6 Click Load.
7 In the left pane of the dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Revision
Tag.rfa.
In the Tags dialog, notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds.
NOTE After you issue a revision, you can no longer modify it. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in
the drawing area, nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds.
5 Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. You can continue to add revisions.
On the Settings menu, click Revisions.
6 In the Revisions dialog, under Add, click New.
A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table.
3 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click to add text without a leader.
4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet.
8 In the Revit MEP window, with the new text box still selected, click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard.
The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet.
NOTE Some formatting may be required once the text is placed in Revit MEP.
Importing Spreadsheets
In this exercise, you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. The only
way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt.
NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. This process may vary from system to system.
This exercise demonstrates a common method.
The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site, as well as a large
lab building.
The large floor plan, or footprint, for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted
sheet as one plan. To effectively document this project, you break up the plan
613
Dependent view of lab building
Dataset
2 In the Project Browser, right-click Level 2, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.
The dependent view opens.
3 In the Project Browser, under Level 2, right-click Dependent on Level 2, and click Rename.
4 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter Level 2 - Aviary, and click OK.
5 Click in the drawing area, and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar, click Zoom To Fit.
6 In the drawing area, select the crop region.
7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out
the lab building.
8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up, confining the view to the upper-left area of the
drawing (the aviary).
■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary. (Align with the
second column of lab cubicles.)
■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building.
■ Click above the left corner of the lab building.
■ Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary.
■ Move the cursor left about 4800 mm, and click.
39 On the Options Bar, for Target view, verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 - Aviary is selected.
40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline.
41 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Floor Plan: Level 2 - Labs.
42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline.
43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the
matchline.
NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references.
NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. Notice that the view reference
for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view.
49 If, after modifying the annotation crop region, the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display, select the room tag
for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area, right-click, and click Hide in view ➤ Elements.
50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3), leaving 4 rooms visible in the view.
52 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Level 2, and click Apply Dependent Views.
After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view, you can apply the view and crop region
specifications to parallel views of the same scale.
53 In the Select Views dialog, select all views in the list, and click OK.
New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view, but are not placed on sheets.
54 In the Project Browser, expand Level 1, and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1.
55 On the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit.
Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1.
Dataset
2 In the Project Browser, right-click South Elevation, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.
The dependent view opens.
3 In the Project Browser, expand South Elevation, right-click Dependent on South Elevation, and click
Rename.
4 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation - Left, and click OK.
5 In the drawing area, select the Crop Region.
20 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Right, and drag it onto the sheet.
21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet.
631
632 | Chapter 12 Viewing and Rendering
Viewing
12
In this tutorial, you learn to create and customize views of building information
models. You learn how to access and create building model views and how to
More specifically, you learn how to change the visibility of detail components,
how to control fill pattern colors, and how to use plan regions within floor plans
633
Viewing a Building Model
In this lesson, you learn to create and customize user-defined views of a building information model.
You create elevations, sections, and three-dimensional (3D) views, and learn how to control the visibility of building
components and annotations within views.
TIP If the Project Browser does not display, on the Standard toolbar, click .
2 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations, and double-click East.
A new view displays a wireframe view of the east elevation view of the building model. Both hidden lines
and window tags display in the east elevation view.
3 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style, and click Hidden Line.
This hides the lines that show through to the exterior of the elevation view. The east elevation view displays
with hidden lines. This change is applied only to the active view, the east elevation. Notice that window
tags continue to display in the view.
10 Move the cursor to the drawing window and notice that it now displays as a hand .
This means you are in pan mode.
11 Pan the view by clicking and dragging the cursor in the drawing area.
The view follows the movement of the cursor.
NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel, you can enable pan mode by pressing and holding
the middle wheel button down. Move the mouse to pan the view.
12 Press and hold CTRL, and notice that the cursor displays as a magnifying glass .
This indicates that you are in zoom mode.
NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel, you can enable zoom mode by rolling the middle
wheel.
13 View the Dynamic View dialog in the lower left corner of the screen.
You can pan, zoom, and spin the building model by clicking the appropriate button in this dialog.
17 In the upper right corner of the viewing window, click X to close the view.
18 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click My 3D View.
19 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a Perspective View with a Camera” on page 637.
TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View.
3 Add the camera to the view by specifying two points: one for the camera position and the other for the
camera target point:
■ Specify the first point in the top right corner of the drawing, outside of the dimension lines.
■ Specify the second point in one of the rooms in the building, as shown in the following illustration.
After you specify the second point (the view target), the new view named 3D View 1 is displayed by default
in a perspective view.
■ Click Dolly and move the cursor into the perspective view.
■ Press and hold the left mouse button.
■ Move the cursor up, down, and sideways to see how the view changes.
■ Click Forward/Back and move the cursor into the perspective view.
■ Press and hold the left mouse button.
■ Move the cursor up and down in the view to move the cursor forward and backward.
■ Click Turn and move the cursor into the perspective view.
■ Press and hold the left mouse button.
■ Move the cursor side to side in the view to rotate the view. You may need to reposition the view with
the other controls.
3D View 1 should update immediately after you move the target point of the camera.
18 Change the target and eye elevation of the camera by modifying its properties:
TIP The updated view depends on the location of the camera before you change the elevation values.
20 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style, and click Shading.
25 Select and move the lower right grip on the section box closer to the model, as shown in the following
illustration.
Notice a dashed green box with blue grips is displayed on the section line. The box represents the extents
of the section view as well as the viewing direction of the section.
5 To view the section, double-click the section head, or in the Project Browser, expand Sections, and
double-click Section 1.
NOTE Fill pattern is dependent on the zoom ratio. You may need to zoom closer to the walls in order to see the
fill pattern.
6 In the Project Browser, select the section view, right-click, and click Find Referring Views.
7 In the Go To View dialog, select Floor Plan: Level 1, and click Open View.
8 Select the section line, and drag the section depth grip below the middle horizontal wall as shown in the
following illustration.
13 Click the control arrows to flip the section view, and select and move the section depth grip under the
lower wall.
14 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
15 Double-click the section head to display the section view.
Notice the change in the view direction.
3 Without clicking in the drawing area, move the cursor around the building model.
Notice that the elevation symbol arrow points to the nearest wall as you move through the building model.
You may need to adjust your zoom settings to see the elevation symbol.
6 To view the new elevation, zoom in, and double-click the elevation symbol arrow.
The elevation is named Elevation 1 - a by default.
9 Select the box shown in the following illustration to add a new elevation view, Elevation 1 - b.
In addition, you can set the color of the coarse scale fill pattern for wall types. This means that in views with a coarse
level of detail, such as the one below, you can choose the wall fill color for a wall type, in this case, a shade of gray.
Dataset
6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click 3D.
7 Zoom in on the brick pattern of the exterior walls.
The surface pattern of the brick is black.
12 Proceed to the next exercise, “Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type” on page 649.
Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type
In this exercise, you learn to set the coarse scale fill pattern color for a wall type. You change the coarse scale fill pattern
from the default color of black to a shade of gray for a wall type. The walls in the floor plan that you work with are
displayed with a gray fill pattern when displayed in a view with a coarse level of detail.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, c_Showroom.rvt.
Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type | 649
Change coarse scale fill pattern color of the arced wall
4 Select the south arced wall, right-click, and click Element Properties.
5 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
By default, the Coarse Scale Fill Color is black and the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern is set to none.
6 In the Type Properties dialog, click in the Coarse Scale Fill Color value field.
7 In the Color dialog, select a shade of gray, and click OK.
8 In the Type Properties dialog, click in the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern parameter value field and click .
9 In the Fill Patterns dialog, select Solid fill for Name, and click OK three times.
10 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
The wall type is displayed as solid gray within any view where the Detail Level is set to Coarse.
14 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique
name.
15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.
If you are not familiar with view ranges in Revit MEP, refer to the online Help for more information.
Because the stepped portion of the walls in the building model is above the cut plane height in the Level 1 floor plan
view, it does not display in the Level 1 floor plan.
By creating a plan region in the view with a different cut plane height, you can display the stepped portion of the walls
in the Level 1 floor plan.
Dataset
TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View.
Plan regions have a single property, view range, which is similar to the view range for plan views. You use
the view range property to control the cut plane, the top and bottom clip planes, and the view depth plane.
3 In the Level 1 view, sketch the plan region using the blue tick marks for guidance:
The plan region displays as a dashed green line. When you select the plan region, the line turns red.
7 Because the top clip plane value cannot be set lower than the cut plane, enter 4000 for the Top Offset.
8 Click Apply, and then click OK twice.
9 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
The Level 1 floor plan should display as shown in the following illustration.
10 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique
name.
11 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.
in Revit MEP 2008 to create rendered interior and exterior views of your building
information model; to place and render decals to create signs, billboards, and
AccuRender is the rendering engine incorporated into Revit MEP that is used to
655
Rendering an Exterior View
In this lesson, you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a building model and render it with the AccuRender
Raytrace feature.
You learn to create and apply materials to a building model, add realistic three-dimensional trees to the building site,
and create the perspective view that you want to render. After you create the perspective view, you select a scene that
defines the model environment, and then raytrace the view to produce the final rendered exterior view.
■ change the texture of the brick material applied to the exterior walls of the building.
■ change the material of the front terrace of the building from the default material to asphalt.
■ define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions on the front curtain wall.
When you complete these changes, you raytrace a region of the building that includes the exterior wall, the floor, and
the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes.
TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar, right-click in the Design Bar, and click the tab
in the context menu.
10 In the left pane of the Material Library dialog, under _accurender, expand Masonry and click Brick.
11 Under Name, select Carib,200mm,Running.
12 Click OK twice.
You can view the new brick texture when you raytrace a region of the building in a later step.
Change the material of the terrace from the default material to asphalt
13 On the Design Bar, click Modify and select the terrace in front of the building.
14 On the Options Bar, verify that Floor : Floor 1 displays in the Type Selector, and click .
15 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
16 In the Type Properties dialog, under Construction, click Edit for Structure.
17 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for Layer 2, click in the Material field that contains Default Floor, and click
.
18 In the Materials dialog, under Name, select Site - Asphalt.
19 Click OK four times.
Define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions
31 In the Type Properties dialog, under Materials and Finishes, click in the Material field, and then click
.
32 In the Materials dialog, under Name, select Aluminum, Polished.
33 Click OK three times.
This completes the changes in materials and textures that you make for the building model.
Raytrace a region of the building to view the material changes that you made
36 In the Scene Selection dialog, verify that New is selected, select Exterior under Type, and click OK.
37 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene, click No.
38 On the Design Bar, click Display Model to end the Region Raytrace command and redisplay the building
model in hidden line wireframe.
39 Proceed to the next exercise, “Adding Trees to the Site” on page 660.
In a later exercise, when you render an exterior view of the model, the leaves of the trees display as indicated by the
season and location specified in the render scene settings.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse.rvt.
TIP If the Site tab is not displayed, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Site.
5 Move the cursor to a location on the building site, and click to place a tree.
Continue to place trees until you have added several red maples to the building site as shown in the
following illustration.
7 In the Type Selector, select any of the deciduous trees, and click .
11 In the Type Properties dialog, under Other, click in the Value field for Plant Name, and then click to
display the Plant Library.
12 In the Plant Library, under accurender, expand Trees and Shrubs, and click Deciduous.
13 Under Name, select Oak, Black, and click OK.
14 In the Type Properties dialog, under Identity Data, select Black Oak for Type Comments.
15 Under Other, enter 7000mm for Plant Height, and click OK twice.
The black oak is shorter than the red maple trees that you added to the site.
16 Move the cursor to the building site, and place two black oak trees, as shown in the following illustration.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse.rvt.
■ Specify the first point on the site facing the building to position the camera.
■ Specify the second point in front of the building facade to define the target point of the camera.
3 Select and move the crop boundary grips until the perspective view displays as in the following illustration.
4 In the Project Browser under Views (all), expand 3D Views, right-click 3D View 1 (the default perspective
view name), and click Show Camera.
5 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans, double-click 1st Flr. Cnst.
The camera position is displayed in the 1st Flr. Cnst. view. The red triangle represents the FOV (field of
vision) angle and the back clipping plane of the view.
6 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in
the following illustration.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse.rvt.
TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to adjust the minutes precisely.
14 Click OK.
15 In the Render Scene Settings dialog, under Scene Settings, click Environment.
16 In the Environment dialog, under Background Color, verify that Automatic Sky is selected.
17 Under Advanced, select Ground Plane.
The Ground Plane tab displays.
18 Click Material.
19 In the Material Library, under _accurender, click Site.
20 In the Name list, select Grass, Rye, Dark.
21 Click OK twice.
22 In the Render Scene Settings dialog, under Scene Settings, select Autumn for Plant Season.
23 Under Raytrace Settings, select Good for Quality, and click OK.
31 In the Project Browser under Views (all), expand Renderings, and double-click Exterior to display the
rendered view of the townhouse that you saved.
32 If you want to save this exercise, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique
name.
33 Proceed to the next lesson, “Rendering an Interior View” on page 668.
To create the rendered scene, you add ArchVision realpeople (RPC people) to the floor plan of the second floor, define
the view and render scene settings, and finally, use both Radiosity and Raytracing to render the view.
Open second floor plan to display the interior scene that you will render
1 In the Project Browser under Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click 2nd Flr. Cnst.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse.rvt.
Add a camera
1 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Camera.
2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point:
■ Specify the first point on the floor plan facing the table and RPC people to place the camera.
The interior perspective is displayed, but you must adjust the field of vision and far clipping plane to display
more of the view.
3 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans, double-click 2nd Flr. Cnst.
5 In the Project Browser under 3D Views, double-click 3D View 1 to redisplay the interior perspective view.
10 On the View toolbar, click to display the 3D view of the building model.
11 On the View menu, click Shading to view the effects of the section box when you add it.
12 On the View menu, click View Properties.
13 In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, select Section Box, and click OK.
A section box is displayed around the building model.
14 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the section box.
Grips are displayed on the section box.
15 Select and move the section box grips until only the room that you added RPC people to and that you
want to render is visible.
16 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a New Render Scene” on page 674.
TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to precisely adjust the minutes.
19 Click Material.
20 In the Material Library, under accurender, click Site.
21 In the Name list, select Grass, Rye, Dark.
22 Click OK twice.
23 In the Render Scene Settings dialog, under Use View’s Section Box, select {3D}.
24 Under Scene Settings, select Summer for Plant Season, and click OK.
25 Proceed to the next exercise, “Defining Daylights and Rendering the View” on page 675.
8 On the Options Bar, select Medium (150 dpi) for Resolution, and click .
The raytraced perspective view is displayed and now includes the RPC people.
9 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique
name.
10 Close the exercise file.
By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial, you rendered an exterior and an interior view. You
learned to use both the Radiosity and Raytracing features included in the AccuRender render engine.
The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path, which is the path that a camera will follow
through your building model. Usually you define the walkthrough path in a plan view, but you can also define it in a
3D, elevation, or section view. The walkthrough path is a spline, and you create it by specifying points that create the
spline. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are
created between the key frames. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. In a plan
view, you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path.
Recording a Walkthrough
After you create a walkthrough, you can record the walkthrough by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with
any available video player independent of your Revit MEP software. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI,
you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough:
■ Wireframe
■ Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines)
■ Shaded or Shaded with Edges
■ AccuRender (Raytrace)
IMPORTANT If you record your walkthrough AVI with the AccuRender display option, you must select or define a scene.
Creating a Walkthrough
In this exercise, you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse.
You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse, proceeds through the dining room, and
ends in the far corner of the living room.
Dataset
NOTE Some Imperial values are used by default in this exercise. If you prefer to use Metric values, click Settings ➤ Project
Units, and change unit formats as desired.
TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar, right-click in the Design Bar, and click the tab
in the context menu.
3 On the Options Bar, verify that Perspective is selected to create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view.
4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room, and click to specify the start point, or the first
key frame, of the walkthrough.
5 Specify four additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown in the
following illustration.
6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room, on the Options Bar, click
7 In the Project Browser under Views (all), expand Walkthroughs, and double-click Walkthrough 1.
8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips.
If it is not, select the crop boundary.
Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size.
9 On the Options Bar, click the dimensions for Size to change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region.
10 In the Crop Region Size dialog, enter 16" for Width and 9" for Height.
11 Under Change, verify Field of view is selected, and click OK.
12 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x), and select the crop boundary.
14 Click .
17 Click .
The walkthrough plays. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines.
18 When the walkthrough stops playing, proceed to the next exercise, “Changing the Walkthrough Path and
Camera Position” on page 680.
5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip), and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown in the
following illustration.
Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration so do not be concerned if the camera
displays at a slightly different location.
9 On the Options Bar, click Edit Walkthrough, and then click to play the walkthrough.
10 Proceed to the next exercise, “Recording the Walkthrough” on page 682.
NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. If you are unsure of what
option to use, the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. It produces files that are larger
than compressed files, but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality.
6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walk-through from the location that you specified in step 3, without
opening Revit MEP 2008.
for creating sustainable designs. Exterior solar studies can show the impact of
shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings. Interior solar
studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building
In this tutorial, you create interior and exterior views of a building information
model to be used in solar studies that you define. You specify settings for summer
and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the
More specifically, you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a
building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during
the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year.
685
Creating Views for Solar Studies
In this lesson, you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies.
■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings.
■ A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building.
■ A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click 01 Entry.
2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Camera.
3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click
in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point, as shown.
A 3D view is created. The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because
of minor variations in camera placement.
Create section
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 01 Entry.
2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house, as shown.
7 In the Project Browser, expand Sections, right-click Section 1, and click Rename.
8 In the Rename View dialog, enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway, and click OK.
NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse, some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid
and do not cast a shadow. In some cases, changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study.
17 To hide the section box, click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. On the Annotation Categories tab, clear
Section Boxes, and click OK.
18 On the File menu, click Save.
19 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View” on page 689.
NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. Typical plan views, such as floor
plans and ceiling plans, do not display many elements in 3D, so no shadows will be cast from these elements.
Dataset
Continue to use the c_Solar_Study.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise.
Create callout
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 01 Entry.
2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Callout.
3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site, including the
house, as shown.
9 In the Dynamic View dialog click to expand the dialog, and under Orient to a View, select Floor Plan:
Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway.
10 In the Dynamic View dialog, click Spin and move the cursor to adjust the view to the right and back to
view the front side, as shown.
17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate.
18 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, right-click {3D}, and click Rename.
19 In the Rename View dialog, enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway, and click OK.
20 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level ➤ Fine.
21 On the File menu, click Save.
22 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in
this lesson:
7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. Click the Single-Day tab.
8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study - Boston, MA, USA is selected, and click Duplicate.
9 In the Name dialog, enter Summer Solstice, Los Angeles, and click OK.
11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, for City, click , select Los Angeles, CA, USA, and click OK.
Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project.
NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset, you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study.
14 In this case, you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level. Clear Ground
Plane at Level.
15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, confirm that Summer Solstice, Los Angeles is selected, and click
Duplicate.
16 In the Name dialog, enter Winter Solstice, Los Angeles, and click OK.
17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, for Date, select December 22, 2006, and click OK.
18 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, click OK.
19 On the File menu, click Save.
20 Proceed to the next exercise, “Previewing Solar Study Animation” on page 693.
3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, under Sun and Shadows Settings, click .
4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, on the Single-Day tab, select Winter Solstice, Los Angeles, and
click OK.
5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, click OK.
6 On the View Control Bar, click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study.
7 On the Options Bar, under Frame, you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation:
8 On the Options Bar, click the control buttons to preview the animation:
NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar.
10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, under Sun and Shadows Settings, click .
11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, on the Single-Day tab, select Summer Solstice, Los Angeles, and
click OK.
12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, click OK.
13 On the View Control Bar, click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study.
NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. Sketching the
living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor
plan helps to determine the best layout.
5 In the Project Browser, expand 3D Views, and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway.
6 On the View Control Bar, click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics.
7 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, verify that Cast Shadows is selected.
13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang, as
shown.
14 Click outside of the section box, and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area, if necessary.
15 To hide the section box, click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. On the Annotation Categories tab, clear
Section Boxes, and click OK.
Export as AVI
■ Click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop.
■ For File name, enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway - Los Angeles.
■ For Save as type, select AVI Files.
■ Under Output Length, select Frame range, and enter 5 to 50.
■ For Frames per second, verify that the value is set to 15.
■ Under Format, for Model Graphics Style, verify that Hidden Line is selected.
■ For Dimensions, enter 450 in the first field (width), and click in the second field (height) to see the
value dynamically changed.
To maintain the proportions of the frame, you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated
automatically. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions.
NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. The AVI can then typically be played from
within the zip file.
Export as PNG
1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed.
2 On the View Control Bar, click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics.
NOTE When you export to PNG, or any single-frame format, such as JPEG, TIFF, BMP, or GIF, it is recommended
that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files, depending on the Frame
Range. In this example, the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop.
3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts, as shown.
5 Select the roof, and on the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category.
Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building.
6 To hide the section box, click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. On the Annotation Categories tab, clear
Section Boxes, and click OK.
7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar:
9 On the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, under Sun and Shadows Settings, click .
10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, click the Multi-Day tab.
11 Select Multi Day Solar Study - Boston, MA, USA, and click Duplicate.
12 In the Name dialog, for File name enter 2pm - Los Angeles - Week Interval, and click OK.
13 Specify values for the multi-day study:
16 In the Video Compression dialog, for Compressor, select Full Frames (Uncompressed), and click OK.
The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop.
NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting, so you may need to make your own adjustment for
specific studies. For example, to see the sun at its highest point on June 22, you would set the time to 1:00 PM
rather than 12:00 PM.
NOTE You must go to a plan view to set True North and you must change the view graphics to True North
before you can change the angle value.
19 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway.
20 Click View menu ➤ Refresh.
Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North.
24 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, click the Single-Day tab, click Summer Solstice, Los Angeles, and
click OK.
25 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, click OK.
27 In the Video Compression dialog, for Compressor, verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected, and
click OK.
The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop.
28 Once you are finished with the study, it is a best practice to change the view graphics setting back to Project
North for documentation and annotation purposes:
NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for
this project.
1 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway.
2 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click each of the following views to review the available
views for rendering:
■ to house from SW
■ to west facade of house
■ living area
This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room.
■ On the Options Bar, for Scene, select Winter solstice 2pm in LA.
■ On the Options Bar, for Resolution, select Draft (75 dpi).
■ On the Options Bar, click GO.
The scene is rendered in full color at draft resolution.
NOTE Rendered views are temporary, so use the Capture Rendering option to save the view in the project.
7 Review some captured images of the building. In the Project Browser, under Renderings, double-click each
of the following images:
the accuracy of the content. A majority of tools in Revit MEP 2008 are intended
to describe number, length, type, and other quantifiable elements within the
context of contract documents. There remain many options in the software that
complexity of the work. To express texture beyond material specifics, and line
In Revit MEP, there are several options for expressing the architecture. They include
the Accurender® Plug-in for Rendering, Advanced Model Graphics, the Linework
Tool, and Section Boxes. There are two directions you can choose when organizing
presentation graphics: realism and stylistics. In this series of exercises, you explore
the stylistic approach. For the realistic approach, tutorials on the Accurender
features of Revit MEP can be found under “Rendering Views and Creating
In this tutorial, you learn several graphic techniques using these above mentioned
relationship among plans, sections, elevations, and details. You can use the
707
building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. Using the pre-built building model,
Dataset
Modify visibility/graphics
TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active, exit the menu, click in the drawing area, and click View
menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again.
5 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog, click the Annotation Categories tab, and clear Show annotation
categories in this view.
This turns off the visibility of all tags, dimensions, sections, elevations, and so on in this view.
NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation.
8 Click OK.
Notice that no annotations display in this view.
9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area, click the Scale control and select 1:100.
Notice the immediate change in the line weights; this represents the view getting smaller.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.
Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog are applied only to the active view.
4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, on the Still tab, select Sun and Shadow Settings.
5 Under Settings, select By Date, Time and Place.
7 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click the Place tab.
8 Select Boston, MA, USA for City, and click OK.
9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, specify 10/27/2006 for Date and 1:00 PM for Time.
10 Select Ground Plane at Level, and select 1st Flr. Cnst.
This is the level the shadow will be cast upon.
11 Click OK.
12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, click OK.
Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. This gives the plan depth and creates a
sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view.
13 On the View Control Bar, click the Advanced Model Graphics control, and click Advanced Model Graphics.
14 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, under Sun and Shadows Settings, click .
15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, under Settings, clear Ground Plane at Level, and click OK.
This turns off the shadows cast on the ground.
TIP If the View tab is not available, right-click the Design Bar, and click View.
2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, select Arch Portrait, and click OK.
Notice the blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented.
5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown, and click to place it.
For this analytique, you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. To accomplish this, you
will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view.
Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region, you must define the inner perimeter
by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model.
TIP Use care when sketching this chain. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details, and you should
take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. If necessary, use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or
overlapping intersections.
TIP If you have difficulty sketching using invisible lines, create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide
lines. When you are finished drawing the chain, select the entire chain (use TAB) and change the line type back
to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector.
26 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Fill Pattern, click .
2 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, right-click Copy of South, and click Rename.
3 In the Rename View dialog, enter Presentation South Elevation, and click OK.
TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active, exit the menu, click in the drawing area, and click View
menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again.
5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog, on the Model Categories tab, under Visibility, click in the Walls
row. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls, click Override.
6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog, under Pattern Overrides, clear Visible, and click OK.
This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view.
7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog, under Visibility, scroll up, expand the Doors category, and clear
Elevation Swing.
8 Click the Annotation Categories tab, and clear Show annotation categories in this view.
This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view.
9 Click OK.
10 On the View Control Bar, click the Advanced Model Graphics control, and click Advanced Model Graphics.
Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog are applied only to the active view.
11 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, verify that Hidden Line is the selected Style.
12 Under Shadow Properties, select Cast Shadows.
13 Under Intensity, specify 35 for Shadow.
TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane.
6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation
floor plan.
7 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it.
5 In the Project Browser, expand Sections (Callout 1), and double-click Section 2.
To fit correctly in the analytique, this view needs to be rotated 180 degrees. To accomplish this, you will
create a callout around the building model components within the section view.
TIP You can also open the callout in the Project Browser by double-clicking Callout of Section 2 under Sections
(Callout 1).
10 In the Project Browser, under Sections (Callout 1), right-click Callout of Section 2, and click Rename.
11 In the Rename View dialog, enter Presentation Section 2, and click OK.
12 In the Project Browser, under Sections (Callout 1), double-click Presentation Section 2.
■ Casework
■ Ceilings
■ Furniture
■ Lighting Fixtures
■ Specialty Equipment
19 Click the Annotation Categories tab, and clear Show annotation categories in this view.
This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view.
20 Click OK.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.
TIP You may need to move the dialog off to the side in order to see the view.
TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of
the section line in the previous exercise.
8 On the View Control Bar, click the Advanced Model Graphics control, and click Advanced Model Graphics.
9 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, under Silhouette Edges, select Override Silhouettes.
10 Under Silhouette Edges, select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style, and click OK.
NOTE The line style, Silhouette Edges, was added to this dataset for training purposes. You can modify this line
style by selecting Line Styles from the Settings menu.
Notice application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model.
TIP You can also use the linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.
10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. Using a clock as a reference, specify 3 o’clock as the
rotation start point.
11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise, and enter 180 to specify the number of degrees of
rotation, and press ENTER.
12 Drag the callout extents until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as
shown.
14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport, and drag it up and to the left as shown.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.
5 In the Project Browser, under Sections (Type 1), right-click Section 1, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.
6 In the Project Browser, under Sections (Type 1), right-click Copy of Section 1, and click Rename.
7 In the Rename View dialog, enter Presentation Section 1, and click OK.
Now, rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique, you can simply apply the
presentation view template.
Create callout
1 In the Project Browser, under Sections (Type 1), double-click Section 1.
2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Callout.
3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown.
After you add the callout, click Modify, select the callout, and modify the extents and the callout head
location as shown.
4 In the Project Browser, under Sections (Callout 1), right-click Callout of Section 1, and click Rename.
5 In the Rename View dialog, enter Presentation Callout, and click OK.
6 In the Project Browser, under Sections (Callout 1), double-click Presentation Callout.
The composition set for the analytique is now complete. In the steps that follow, you add a heavy base to
the floors and a poche to the base. Although there are several methods you could use to create these areas
of contrast, the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout.
21 In the Project Browser, under Sections (Callout 1), double-click Presentation Callout.
22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Filled Region.
23 On the Design Bar, click Region Properties.
24 In the Element Properties dialog, select Solid Black for Type, and click OK.
25 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar, sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below.
Click Finish Sketch on the Design Bar when you are finished.
You can sketch all of them at once or one filled region at a time. You do not have to replicate the image
exactly. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as it is a stylized
representation of the architectural forms.
29 On the Options Bar, click , and sketch the rectangle shown below.
4 On the View Control Bar, click the Advanced Model Graphics control, and click Advanced Model Graphics.
5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, specify the following:
■ Select Directly.
■ Specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees.
■ Specify an Altitude of 45 degrees.
■ Select Relative to View.
■ Select Ground Plane at Level.
■ Select 1st Flr. Cnst. in the list.
9 Click OK.
10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, under Silhouette Edges, select Override Silhouettes.
11 Under Silhouette Edges, select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style, and click OK.
12 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, right-click Isometric, and click Rename.
13 In the Rename View dialog, enter Isometric 1, and click OK.
14 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, right-click Isometric 1, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.
15 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, right-click Copy of Isometric 1, and click Rename.
16 In the Rename View dialog, enter Isometric 2, and click OK.
TIP Notice there is also a rotation symbol. You can use this to rotate the section box.
21 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box, and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway
through the second floor as shown.
When you are finished, click Modify on the Design Bar.
Before turning off the visibility of the section box, make a duplicate of the view.
22 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, right-click Isometric 2, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.
23 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, right-click Copy of Isometric 2, and click Rename.
NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box, the stairs and railings may display.
In such a case, either adjust the plane location, or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the
Visibility/Graphics dialog.
36 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, drag Isometric 1 underneath Isometric 2 as shown and, in the
Type Selector, select Viewport: Presentation.
Notice the filled region partially covers the view. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.
3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown, and specify the range and direction just
outside the upper right corner of the building model.
4 Adjust the crop boundary so the entire building model fits within it.
5 On the View Control Bar, click the Advanced Model Graphics control, and click Advanced Model Graphics.
6 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, specify the following:
13 Use the section controls to modify the location of each respective plane until your view resembles the
following image. You may need to adjust the location of the crop boundary as well.
16 In the Crop Region Size dialog, under Change, select Scale (locked proportions).
17 Under Model Crop Size, enter 165 mm for Width, and click OK.
18 To hide the crop region, click View menu ➤ View Properties. Clear Crop Region Visible, and click OK.
19 To hide the section box, click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. On the Annotation Categories tab, clear
Section Boxes, and click OK.
753
754 | Chapter 16 Creating Families
About Families and the
Family Editor 16
All elements in Revit MEP 2008 are “family based.” The term family describes a
powerful concept used throughout Revit MEP to help you manage your data and
make changes easily. Each family element can have multiple types defined within
it, each with a different size, shape, material set, or other parameter variables as
designed by the family creator. Even though various types within a family can
look completely different, they are still related and come from a single source,
thus the term family. Changes to a family type definition ripple through the
project and are automatically reflected in every instance of that family or type
within the project. This keeps everything coordinated and saves you the time and
In this tutorial, you learn about the various types of families and the Family Editor.
755
Using Families and the Family Editor
One of the many advantages of using Revit MEP is the ability to create your own families of components without
having to learn a complex programming language. Using the Family Editor, you create a family within predefined
templates that contain the intelligent objects needed to create the particular family type. You provide the information
necessary to uniquely describe the family geometry.
In this lesson, you learn about the three types of families and how they are used within a project and how they are
created. You also learn about the Family Editor, and when and how to use it.
Introduction to Families
Most families are created in the Family Editor and saved as separate files with an .rfa extension. All different types that
you create are stored with the master family file. For example, if you create a family called "double-hung window" that
includes types with several sizes, the types would all be saved as one file which can then be loaded into any project.
This makes file management much easier, because there is only one file to track. There are, however, exceptions to this
rule. Some family types are pre-defined within Revit MEP and cannot be created or modified outside of the project
environment. Walls, floors, and roofs are examples of these types of families. In addition, there is another type of family
that allows you to create any shape or form required for a particular project and have Revit MEP recognize it as a
particular component type, such as a dome roof.
Revit MEP has three types of families:
■ System
■ Standard Component
■ In-place
System Families
System families are pre-defined within Revit MEP and comprise principle building components such as walls, floors,
and roofs. The basic walls system family, for example, has wall types that define interior, exterior, foundation, generic,
and partition wall styles. You can duplicate and modify existing system families, but you cannot create new system
families.
NOTE You can use “Transfer Project Standards” to copy system families from one project to another.
The following illustration shows different types within the basic walls family.
Standard component families are loaded by default in project templates, while many more are stored in component
libraries. You work with the Family Editor to create and modify components. You can either duplicate and modify an
existing component family or create a new component family based on a variety of family templates.
Family templates are either host-based or standalone. Host-based families have components that require hosts. An
example is a door family hosted by a wall family. Standalone families include columns, trees, and furniture. Family
templates assist you in creating and manipulating component families.
Standard component families can exist outside of the project environment and have an .rfa extension. You can load
them into projects, transfer them from one project to another, and save them from a project file to your library if
needed.
In-place Families
In-place families are either model or annotation components in a particular project. You create in-place families only
within the current project, so they are useful for objects unique to that project; for example, custom wall treatments.
You have a choice of categories when you create in-place families, and the category that you use determines the
component’s appearance and display control within the project.
The following illustration shows a building model of the Pantheon without a roof and with an in-place roof family.
In this section, you learned about the different types of Revit MEP families and when to use them. In the final exercise,
you learn about the Family Editor, how to access it, and when to use it.
During the design process, you will inevitably come to a point where you need a specific component for your design.
In this case, presume it is a bay window that you require. There is a logical thought process that you should follow:
1 Is there a component of this type already loaded into this project? If so, it should be available within the Type
Selector.
2 If there isn’t a component family loaded in the project, you can search the component library loaded on your local
hard drive. Also consider any internal family libraries that may exist on the network.
3 Next, consider checking the web library and other web resources, such as newsgroups.
4 If you can’t find the component you require, you should then try to find the component that most closely resembles
it. It is far easier to modify an existing component within the Family Editor than to create it from scratch. If you
find a close match, open it in the Family Editor, modify it as needed, and then load it into the project.
5 Finally, if you have exhausted your external resources, you should create a new component family using one of
the family templates as a starting point.
You can access the Family Editor in several ways. With Revit MEP open, you can click File ➤ Open, navigate to a family
file, and click Open. When the family opens, it opens within the Family Editor. This will be apparent because the only
Design Bar tab available is Family.
Within the Windows® environment, you can double-click any file with an .rfa extension and it will open Revit MEP
in the Family Editor. You can have a project open and the Family Editor open simultaneously.
To start a new family, click File ➤ New ➤ Family, select the appropriate template, and click Open.
lesson, you learn how to create a different type of component. Using the installed
templates, you start with a simple door family and then move onto a window
family. You create a furniture family, a lighting fixture, and several annotation
families. In addition, you create an in-place family. When you create an in-place
family, you create it within the project file, not within the Family Editor. This
allows you to create the family in the context of the current project.
759
Creating a Door Family
In this lesson, you create a custom door family based on the definition of a flush exterior door. After you create the
door leaf as an extrusion, you create new door types based on size and assign parameters respectively.
You also learn how to constrain the door design by adding labelled dimensions to specify values for the door width,
height, and thickness.
14 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the door panel to the bottom edge as shown.
NOTE This same label is applied to the dimension referencing the door opening. Because labelled dimensions
are parameters, a user can change the value of the Width parameter and all dimensions labelled with it change
accordingly.
20 Select the dimension with the two EQ symbols and move it, along with the witness line controls, so it
doesn’t visually interfere with the door swing location, as shown.
TIP If the Arc from Center and End Points command is not visible on the Options Bar, click the down arrow
button, and select the command from the menu.
When drawing an arc from center and end points, you first specify the arc center, then you specify each
end point.
24 Enter SI, and select the intersection at the upper left corner of the door opening for the arc center point.
25 Select the upper right corner of the door opening for the arc start point.
26 Select the upper left corner of the door leaf for the arc endpoint.
In the image below, the arc is selected so you can see the arc center and each end point.
27 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry” on page 765.
TIP When you add the witness line to the exterior face of the extrusion, use the TAB key to toggle to the extrusion
reference, then click to specify the dimension witness line.
22 Proceed to the next exercise, “Assigning Materials to the Door Components” on page 768.
10 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Materials and Finishes, click for Material.
11 In the Materials dialog box, under Name, select Oak Door, and click OK.
12 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK.
The door leaf is assigned the new Oak Door material.
20 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under 3D Views, double-click View 1.
21 On the View Control Bar, click the Model Graphics Style control, and select Shading with Edges.
The Oak Door material is now assigned to the door leaf and door frame.
27 Click OK.
28 Proceed to the next exercise, “Defining New Door Types” on page 770
11 Click OK.
You now have three new door types defined within your door family.
You now have three new flush exterior doors based on the new door family prototype. This completes the lesson,
Creating a Door Family.
Change the height and width values again, and click Apply. Notice how the window opening adapts to
the changing dimension values. This process is called “flexing the model,” and it is done to avoid conflicts
and to ensure that all model geometry adjusts to changes as designed.
11 Enter 1000 mm for Height and 2000 mm for Width, and click Apply.
This is the starting point for the new window.
12 Click OK.
13 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry” on page 775.
19 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the reference plane.
NOTE When you sketch the frame profile, the exact dimensions are not critical. However, the frame profile
should extend beyond the edges of the wall. Precise dimensions are assigned to the frame profile in subsequent
steps.
27 Select the left edge of the frame section, and drag it to the interior face of the wall. When the lock displays,
click it to constrain the left edge of the frame to the interior face.
28 Select the short line parallel and to the right of the Sash reference plane. Drag it to the left and align it
with the Sash reference plane. When the lock displays, click it to lock the line to the reference plane.
TIP After adding the dimension, click Modify, select the line you want to move, and specify the dimension value.
31 Select the 40 mm dimension. When the lock displays, click the lock to constrain the present value.
TIP If you don’t see the lock icon, zoom out until it displays.
32 Select the 20 mm dimension. When the lock displays, click the lock to constrain the present value.
37 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click View 1.
If necessary, spin the model so you can see the interior of the frame.
5 On the Options Bar, click , and enter - 45 mm for Depth, and select Lock.
6 Place the cursor over the left side of the frame, press TAB to cycle through the selection options, and select
the option, Chain of walls or lines.
■ Click .
■ Enter - 50 mm for Offset.
You specify a negative offset value to indicate an extrusion direction inside of the window frame.
■ Click .
8 Specify the upper left inside corner of the window frame for the first corner of the rectangle, and then
specify the lower right inside corner for the second corner of the rectangle.
12 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry” on page 784.
16 On the Options Bar, click , enter -12 mm for Depth, and select Lock.
17 Place the cursor on one of the sash extrusion lines, press TAB until the chain of lines is preselected, and
click to create the glass boundary.
NOTE Assigning subcategories to model elements is important. After the family is loaded into a project, you can
control subcategory visual style using the Objects Styles dialog box.
NOTE After flexing the model, it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as
expected. For example, make sure the window frame stretched with the opening and that the glass extrusion
remains attached to the interior edge of the sash. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems
early. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines.
28 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry” on page 789.
Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.
Add reference planes to specify the location of the new window mullion centerlines
1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Exterior.
2 On the Design Bar, click Ref Plane.
3 Add two horizontal and two vertical reference planes inside of the window opening to approximate the
mullion centerline locations as shown.
NOTE When you draw each reference plane, the exact location is not critical. Precise dimensions are assigned
to the reference planes in subsequent steps.
5 Add a dimension between the top of the window opening (top reference plane) and the horizontal reference
plane below it, as shown. Do not be concerned with dimension values.
6 Add a dimension between the bottom of the window opening (bottom reference plane) and the horizontal
reference plane above it, as shown. Do not be concerned with dimension values.
TIP Due to the length of the dimension label, you may want to drag the dimension value as shown.
14 Click the dimension value, and enter 350 mm as the new value.
After you complete the sketch, notice lock icons display on the interior horizontal edges of the sash.
25 Click both of the locks so the mullion adapts to changes in window height.
29 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the dimension you added in the previous step.
30 On the Options Bar, select <Add parameter> for Label.
31 In the Parameter Properties dialog box, specify the following parameters:
NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously.
■ Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality
constraint.
■ Add a dimension between the left and right mullion edges.
■ Select the dimension, and on the Options Bar, select Mullion Width for Label.
Do not be concerned with the value of the mullion width. This is changed in later steps.
35 In the Family Types dialog box, enter 40 mm for Mullion Width, and click Apply.
Notice the mullions remain centered and equally spaced on the reference planes.
Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters, and the mullions stretch with the new window
height.
37 In the Family Types dialog box, return the window to its original dimensions:
43 Sketch a rectangle centered on the upper horizontal mullion reference plane approximately as shown, and
then click the lock icons to lock the left and right edges to the edge of the sash.
48 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the dimension you added in the previous step.
49 On the Options Bar, select Mullion Width for Label. Move the dimension value as shown.
50 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the lower horizontal reference plane
as shown. Remember, follow these basic steps:
■ Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality
constraint.
■ Add a dimension between the upper and lower mullion edges.
■ Select the dimension, and on the Options Bar, select Mullion Width for Label.
55 Adjust the location of the window model within the drawing area, so when you open the Family Types
dialog box, you can still see the window.
56 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.
57 In the Family Types dialog box, do the following:
Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters and the mullions stretch with the new window
height.
59 Proceed to the next exercise, “Assigning Materials to the Window Components” on page 801.
Assign the Pine Frame material to the frame, sash, and mullions
TIP Hold the CTRL key down as you select the sweep and various extrusions.
26 Proceed to the next exercise, “Defining New Window Types” on page 804.
Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.
4 In addition to flexing the model after the addition or modification of model geometry, it is also a good
idea to flex the model after a new formula is applied.
In the Family Types dialog box, enter 2000 mm for Height, and click Apply.
The window height is doubled, but the one third height spacing is maintained in the horizontal mullions.
5 In the Family Types dialog box, enter 1000 mm for Height, and click Apply.
6 In the Family Types dialog box, under Family Types, click New.
7 In the Name dialog box, enter 2500 w x 1250mm h for Name, and click OK.
8 In the Family Types dialog box, specify the following parameter values:
You now have three new window types defined within your window family.
17 On the Standard toolbar, click to start a new project based on your default template.
18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Window.
19 On the Options Bar, click Load.
20 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of your Training Window.rfa file, select it, and click Open.
Finally, you assign new dimension values to the furniture to create new types within the furniture family, and specify
values for the furniture length and depth.
The reference planes that display are part of the default furniture template; they represent the furniture
centerline axes.
NOTE When you draw the reference planes, their exact location is not critical. Precise dimensions are assigned
to the reference planes in subsequent steps.
7 Draw two horizontal reference planes, one above and one below the existing horizontal centerline reference
plane as shown.
8 Draw two vertical reference planes, one to the left and one to the right of the existing vertical centerline
reference plane as shown.
11 Add an overall horizontal dimension underneath the dimension you just added. It should reference the
left reference plane and the right reference plane as shown.
TIP To do this, select each reference plane and drag the extents to the new position. Afterwards, select each
dimension and drag the witness line controls as needed.
These reference planes will be the skeleton that you snap the solid geometry to. Therefore, you should flex
the design now to ensure the reference planes and labelled dimensions adapt to changes as expected.
29 Adjust the location of the reference planes within the drawing area, so when you open the Family Types
dialog box, you can still see the model.
30 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.
Notice the reference planes adapt to the new dimension parameters. When the solid geometry is snapped
to the reference planes, it will also adapt to the same changes.
32 In the Family Types dialog box, return the parameters to their original values:
33 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry” on page 815.
NOTE In the image below, the symbolic line thickness was modified for training purposes. Your lines may have
a lighter weight.
15 Move the cursor over the bottom edge of the desktop, press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in
the Status Bar, and select the bottom edge.
16 Drag the bottom edge of the desktop up until the desktop is 100 mm thick.
19 Add a vertical dimension from the bottom of the desktop to the top edge.
28 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area, so when you open the Family Types dialog box,
you can still see the model.
29 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.
30 In the Family Types dialog box, do the following:
31 In the Family Types dialog box, return the parameters to their original values:
32 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry” on page 818.
Offset two reference planes to locate the first drawer base corner
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Ref. Level.
2 On the Design Bar, click Ref Plane.
5 Move the cursor over the upper horizontal reference plane, and click to locate a new horizontal reference
plane offset 100 mm below it.
8 Add a dimension to the top horizontal reference plane and the offset plane below it. Lock the dimension
as shown.
15 Click both of the lock icons to lock the edges of the extrusion to the reference planes.
TIP You can select multiple elements by holding the CTRL key down. You can also highlight the entire line chain,
using the TAB key.
A duplicate of the left drawer base is mirrored to create the right drawer base.
25 Click the lock icon to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane.
■ Add a dimension from the right vertical reference plane to the right edge of the drawer base, and then
click the lock icon to lock the dimension.
28 Add two final dimensions, one on each extrusion that references the width of the drawer base, as shown.
29 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the left extrusion.
30 On the Options Bar, select <Add parameter...> for Label.
31 In the Parameter Properties dialog box, specify the following:
46 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box,
you can still see the model.
47 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.
48 In the Family Types dialog box, do the following:
49 In the Family Types dialog box, return the parameters to their original values:
50 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry” on page 827.
10 Select the right vertical edge of the desktop extrusion, then select the right parallel sketch line, and lock
the alignment.
TIP You may need to click the down arrow button, and then select the fillet arc tool from the menu.
15 Select the left vertical sketch line, the upper sketch line, and then move the cursor down and to the right
until you create and arc similar to the image below. Do not be concerned with the precise dimension of
the arc radius.
Align the left and right edges of the rolltop with the drawer bases
20 Select the right edge of the right drawer base, select the right edge of the rolltop, and click the lock icon.
22 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog
box, you can still see the model.
23 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.
24 In the Family Types dialog box, do the following:
The desk should adapt to all the changes. If not, you may need to align and lock problematic edges that
did not remain aligned. You can also use dimension constraints.
26 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry” on page 833.
Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.
NOTE The exact configuration of the rectangles representing the drawer fronts is not critical.
NOTE Adding and locking these dimensions is very important. If you modify the desk length or the drawer base
width, these locked dimension assure that the drawers flex as expected. If you cannot see the locks on the
dimensions, zoom the view until you do.
14 On the Tools toolbar, click , and repeat the previous step by selecting the right vertical lines of the
drawer set on the left.
21 Draw a pick box around the entire desk to select all the extrusions.
23 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Materials and Finishes, click for Material.
24 In the Materials dialog box, click Duplicate.
25 In the New Material dialog box, enter Desk - Wood, Cherry, and click OK.
32 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog
box, you can still see the model.
33 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.
34 In the Family Types dialog box, do the following:
The desk should adapt to all the changes. If not, you may need to align and lock problematic edges that
did not remain aligned. You can also use dimension constraints.
35 In the Family Types dialog box, return the parameters to their original values:
36 Proceed with the final exercise in this lesson, “Defining New Furniture Types” on page 836.
13 On the Standard toolbar, click to start a new project based on your default template.
You now have three new rolltop desks based on the new rolltop desk furniture family prototype. This completes the
Creating a Furniture Family lesson.
Drawing a Baluster
In this exercise, you draw a baluster with an extrusion.
The reference planes that display are part of the default baluster template. The bottom of the baluster is at
the reference level and the baluster has an assigned default height of 750mm. Top and bottom cut angles
for the baluster are also displayed.
3 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Ref. Level.
NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, the baluster
profile should be centered on the vertical and horizontal reference planes. Draw your profile approximately
30mm wide by 60mm deep.
15 Save the new baluster family with the name Training Baluster.rfa.
The new custom baluster is now complete.
12 On the Design Bar, click Modify and select the existing railing.
NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, the sweep
profile should begin at the reference plane intersection.
2 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the sweep profile with line and arc segments as shown.
3 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Sweep.rfa.
The new sweep profile is now complete.
NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, the top of
the rail profile should coincide with the rail top reference plane.
3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the rail profile with line segments as shown.
4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Rail.rfa.
The new rail profile is now complete.
Create a new family based on the default stair nosing profile template
1 Notice the existing planes and text provided within the template.
The reference planes that display are part of the default stair nosing profile template, with the vertical
reference plane labeled as the riser face and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the tread surface.
Additional text specifies the lower-left quadrant as the location for the stair nosing.
NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, you must
draw the stair nosing in the lower-left quadrant. In addition, the top of the stair nosing profile should coincide
with the tread surface reference plane and the right edge of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the
riser face reference plane.
3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the stair nosing profile with line and arc segments as
shown.
4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Stair Nosing.rfa.
The new stair nosing profile is now complete.
NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines, their exact location is not critical. However, the left edge of the
reveal profile must coincide with wall face reference plane and the reveal must be drawn within the wall body
(to the right of the wall face reference plane).
3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the reveal profile with line segments as shown.
4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Reveal.rfa.
The new reveal profile is now complete.
Create a new family based on the default host sweep profile template
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, verify that Ref. Level is open.
NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines, their exact location is not critical. However, the left edge of the
host sweep profile must coincide with the host face reference plane, and the host sweep profile must be drawn
outside of the host body (to the right of the host face reference plane).
3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the reveal profile with line and arc segments as shown.
4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Host Sweep.rfa.
The new host sweep profile is now complete.
6 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep.
7 On the Design Bar, click Sketch 2D Path.
NOTE When you sketch the 2D path, the exact location of the path is not critical.
8 On the Design Bar, click Lines and sketch the 2D path approximately as shown.
16 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations, and double-click South.
20 Select the sweep profile and, on the Options Bar, click Edit.
21 Select the sweep profile again and, on the Options Bar, click .
22 In the Element Properties dialog box, do the following:
23 Click OK.
24 On the Design Bar, click Finish Family.
6 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar, click Host Sweep ➤ Wall Sweep.
7 On the Options Bar, verify that Horizontal is selected.
8 Select a point on the left wall for the wall sweep.
9 Select a point on the right wall for the next wall sweep.
Replace the default wall sweep with the new host wall sweep
The default wall sweep is replaced with your host sweep profile.
The reference planes that display are part of the default room tag template.
15 In the Select Parameter dialog box, select Name, and click OK.
16 Zoom in on the label.
20 Specify a point below the Floor Finish label for the next label location.
21 In the Select Parameter dialog box, select Ceiling Finish, and click OK.
22 Specify a point below the Ceiling Finish label for the last label location.
23 In the Select Parameter dialog box, select Area, and click OK.
24 Save the new room tag with the name Finish Area Tag.rfa.
The new room tag is now ready for use.
Create a new annotation symbol based on the default generic annotation template
1 In the Project Browser, notice that there is only one view available.
The reference planes that display are part of the default generic annotation template. Notes included with
the template specify annotation parameters.
8 Draw a vertical line from the top to the center point of the circle.
9 Draw a vertical line from the center point to the bottom of the circle.
15 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the upper vertical line.
16 In the Type Selector, select North Line.
17 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
19 Save the new north arrow with the name, Training North Arrow.rfa.
The titleblock has linework, text, and labels. You customize the titleblock with a new text style, graphics, and your
project data.
10 Draw a horizontal line 120mm below the last horizontal line as shown.
12 On the Design Bar, click Modify, press CTRL, and select the second and third horizontal lines.
13 In the Type Selector, select Wide Lines.
14 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet.
15 On the Design Bar, click Lines.
16 In the Type Selector, select Title Blocks.
17 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the last text note.
18 Select the drag handle, and drag the text note down as shown.
■ Consultant:
■ Address:
■ Address:
■ Telephone:
22 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the consultant text note.
26 Move the cursor down 120mm and click to specify the first copied text note position.
27 Move the cursor down another 120mm and click to specify the second copied text note location.
43 In the Select Parameter dialog box, select Project Issue Date, and click OK.
The label displays a default value wrapped to 3 lines.
44 Select the left drag handle on the label, and drag to the left until the label displays on one line.
NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text.
NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text.
47 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Checked By field, and click to specify the label location.
48 In the Select Parameter dialog box, select Checked By and click OK.
NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text.
63 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Number field, and click to specify the label
location.
64 In the Select Parameter dialog box, select Project Name, and click OK.
65 Select the left drag handle on the label, and drag to the left until the label displays on one line.
66 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Name field, and click to specify the label
location.
67 In the Select Parameter dialog box, select Client Name, and click OK.
68 Select the left drag handle on the label, and drag to the left until the label displays on one line.
81 Save the new titleblock family with the name Training A0Horizontal Titleblock.rfa.
The titleblock graphics, text, and labels are now complete.
14 Click OK.
NOTE This project was created using an imperial template and components. To change the units of measurement to meters,
on the Settings menu, click Project Units. Set the Length units to millimeters, set the Area to Square meters, format the Area
to use 2 decimal places, and set the suffix to None.
2 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations, and double-click South.
10 In the Go To View dialog box, select Section: Wall Section - Center, and click Open View.
Draw the axis of rotation for the dome roof revolved form
The circle is tangent to the interior wall face and the level 1 reference plane at the floor line.
The reference planes that display are guides for drawing the oculus rim profile.
21 Snap to reference plane intersections, and draw the five rim profile line segments in the shape of a reverse
C as shown.
25 Select the intersection of the circle and the lower left vertical line of the profile as shown.
The circle is trimmed between the rim profile and the first split point.
37 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Materials and Finishes, click for Material.
38 In the Materials dialog box, select Concrete - Cast-in-Place Lightweight Concrete for Name, and click OK.
39 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK.
40 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.
41 On the Design Bar, click Finish Family.
9 In the Go To View dialog box, select Section: Wall Section - Center, and click Open View.
NOTE You may need to zoom in closer to the intersection to select the first point.
16 Drag the cursor up 800 mm, and specify the next point for the floor profile as shown.
17 Specify the intersection of the level 1 reference plane and the interior wall edge for the next point of the
floor profile as shown.
During this tutorial, you learn the process and methodology of creating a new
techniques and best practices that you can apply broadly when creating other
The parametric component that you design in this tutorial is an open web wood
floor truss. In this case, the length of the trimmable truss determines the size and
grade of the truss chords. In the center of the truss is a mechanical service clearance
to accommodate HVAC systems. The truss also has multiple types, formula-based
component uses a broad spectrum of design techniques within the Family Editor.
The goal of this tutorial is to teach you the proper approach to parametric
component creation, not specifically how to make a floor truss. At the end of this
tutorial, you will understand the process, methodology, and the specific techniques
879
Planning a Parametric Component Family
Creating a new parametric component family is no different than any other design process; planning ahead is one of
the most important steps. Knowing why you are creating a particular family and what you need it to do will drive the
specific design process. In this lesson, you accomplish two main tasks: you determine the component needs and select
the family template that is suited to those needs.
2 What additional design requirements affect the design plan for this beam family?
The design requirements dictate how simple or complex a family must be. In this case, the beam design
must be advanced in order to have the flexibility that the specs require.
NOTE When creating a new family, you should avoid over-designing the component. If the design requirements
can be met with a simple design, then you should design only what is needed to satisfy the requirements. For
every complexity added to a family, there is a computing performance cost that must be paid within the project.
Take this into consideration during your design planning.
You have completed the planning stage for the new family. Depending on the family you are designing,
the planning stage and questions may differ.
4 Continue with the next exercise, “Selecting the Family Template” on page 881.
3 In the left pane of the New dialog box, click Training Files, and open Metric\Templates.
4 Scroll through the various template options.
Notice that most of the template names include the component type. In addition, the template name often
includes information how the component would be used with a project, for example: wall based or floor
based.
NOTE Do not double-click the template or open it. Select it so that the preview displays.
On the right side of the New dialog box, notice the preview.
Like most generic family templates, it provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and
Center (front/back).
7 Select Metric Structural Framing - Complex and Trusses.rft, and notice the preview.
Although the template name suggests this is the appropriate template, it is not the best starting point for
the beam family.
8 Select Metric Structural Framing - Beams and Braces.rft and notice the preview.
Notice this template offers three vertical planes on each side of the center (left/right) reference plane. These
planes are designed specifically to accommodate point-to-point beam insertion and the special snapping
and display requirements of beam components. This template is the best starting point for the new family.
This beam extrusion is supplied within the template as a starting point. Like many templates, the geometry
supplied can be used or discarded as needed.
13 Proceed to the next lesson, “Creating the Component Skeleton” on page 884.
NOTE When creating or modifying a family, it is not necessary to create a skeleton of reference planes or lines and then align
and lock the solid geometry to it. Dimensioning the solid geometry directly also works; however, using reference planes and
lines is considered more reliable and is therefore a best practice.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you started in the previous exercise.
NOTE The reference planes shown in the project image below were added as a training reference. Reference
planes that display within a family file do not display within a project.
Each family template has a different set of reference planes established within it. Before adding new reference
planes, it is important to be familiar with the template so you do not create duplicate or conflicting planes.
8 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm below the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back).
You will use these two reference planes to control the beam width and keep it centered on the reference
plane: Center (Front/Back).
12 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm above the Level: Ref. Level.
TIP You can also use the mirror tool to accomplish this task. To do this, select the lower horizontal reference
plane, click on the Edit toolbar, and select the Level: Ref. Level as the mirror axis.
These two reference planes mark the top and bottom extents of the beam. This beam requires additional
reference planes to complete the truss skeleton.
15 Place the cursor over the top horizontal reference plane. When a copy of the reference plane displays below
it, click to place it.
TIP You can control the direction of the offset by moving the cursor slightly to either side of the line you intend
to pick.
17 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Left, and when a copy of the reference plane displays to
the right of it, click to place it as shown.
18 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Right, and when a copy of the reference plane displays to
the left of it, click to place it as shown.
You have completed the reference planes that make up the skeleton of the chords. Before you move on to
the next exercise, you must add four additional reference planes to accommodate the center chase.
21 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right), and when a copy of the reference plane displays
to the right of it, click to place it as shown.
NOTE You use this family for the remainder of this tutorial. Make sure you remember where you saved it.
28 Proceed to the next exercise, “Adding Dimensions and Constraints” on page 890.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.
3 Select each of the horizontal reference planes and place the dimension to the left as shown. After adding
the dimension, separate the overriding values by dragging the value controls as shown.
11 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane
and move it to the left of the equality constrained dimension you added previously.
12 Add a dimension referring to the three vertical reference planes in the center of the model, place the
dimension under the lines as shown and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint.
13 Add a dimension referring to the reference planes to the left and right of the Center (Left/Right) reference
plane, and place it below the dimension you added previously.
You have finished adding the dimensions and constraints that control how the truss skeleton adapts to
changes. Throughout the tutorial, you will add additional reference planes, dimensions, and constraints
as needed.
In the next exercise, you label the dimensions to create instance and type parameters. These parameters
are the key to providing flexibility within a project. In addition, they allow you to “flex” the model in
order to test your design.
■ If the component comes in standard sizes that must be maintained, consider making it a type parameter.
■ If the component is something that is cut or otherwise extremely flexible, consider making it an instance parameter.
■ If the component has material that varies per component, consider making the material parameter an instance
parameter.
■ If the parameter controls something that usually remains constant by its nature, consider making it a type parameter.
You should lean towards simplicity whenever possible.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.
■ Click OK.
9 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the center chase interior.
12 On the right side of the model, select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the lower horizontal
truss chord as shown.
TIP You may need to drag the text label downward as shown.
15 On the right side of the model, select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the upper horizontal
truss chord.
16 On the Options Bar, select Chord Thickness for Label.
19 Click Cancel.
20 On the File menu, click Save.
21 Proceed to the next exercise, “Flexing the Component Model” on page 897.
When you flex a family, you should always do it from the Family Types dialog box, rather than by manually stretching
or manipulating the objects within the family. When you change a parameter value and apply the change, this is the
most accurate way of testing how the family will behave within a project.
In this exercise, you flex the model to test the various length parameters that you added in the previous exercise. Even
though you have yet to add any model geometry to the family, it is important to verify that the reference lines adjust
to changes as constraints are maintained. After you verify this, you can add the model geometry to the skeleton and
be relatively certain that it will also flex as expected.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.
■ Maximize the Revit window and adjust the zoom settings so the model is in one corner of the drawing
area. When you open the Family Types dialog, you can drag it to the opposing corner.
or
■ Reduce the Revit window and keep the model centered in the drawing area. When you open the Family
Types dialog box, you can drag it off the Revit window as shown.
Adjust your display using one of the two methods before opening the Family Types dialog box.
2 On the Design Bar, click Family Types, and drag the dialog box so that you can view the model.
3 In the Family Types dialog box, under Dimensions, enter 600 mm for Depth, and click Apply.
4 Enter 450 mm for Depth, 80 mm for Chord Thickness, 800 mm for Center Chase Width, and click Apply.
Notice that the model adapts to all of the changes.
Reset parameters
5 In the Family Types dialog box, reset the parameters back to their original values:
9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the top chord sketch as shown.
NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. You can ignore this warning
because after you finish trimming, the lines will no longer overlap.
4 Drag the right arrow control to the right until it snaps to the reference plane: Member Right, as shown.
Click the lock symbol to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane.
6 Prepare the view for flexing in the same way you did during the flexing exercise. You’ll want to set up your
screen so you can see the model truss while the Family Types dialog box is open.
On the Design Bar, click Family Types.
7 In the Family Types dialog box, enter 6000 for Length, and click Apply.
Notice that the extrusions did not move or change their length. This is because the length dimension
references the extreme left and right reference planes, not the member right or member left reference
planes. Therefore, you must add a new constraint before flexing the length.
8 In the Family Types dialog box, enter 3000 for Length, click Apply, and click OK.
In this particular case, adding this constraint to the model has no impact on how it works within a project.
This is a two-point placement beam family that uses the member left and member right reference planes
as the determining extents of this component. Later in this lesson, you load this family into a project to
test how it works within a project environment.
TIP If one of the extrusion ends did not adjust as expected, use the Align tool and add the constraint. Afterwards,
flex the model once again to make sure the fix works as expected.
14 Click OK.
TIP When flexing, it is important to remember the original values so you can reset them afterwards. Therefore,
try picking a method, such as doubling, that allows you to easily return to the original values.
■ Click Apply.
Dataset
Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes.
19 For the align-to reference, select the reference line on the top of the lower chord as shown.
You may need to press TAB to toggle the selection options.
21 Align the top edge of the chase extrusions with the reference line coincident with the lower edge of the
upper chord, and lock the alignment as shown.
The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, redo any problematic alignments and constraints.
26 Zoom to Fit.
31 Select the Chord Thickness dimension in the lower-right corner of the view.
32 On the Options Bar, select Trimmable End Length for Label.
33 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.
34 In the Family Types dialog box, under Dimensions, enter 300mm for Trimmable End Length, click Apply,
and click OK.
NOTE This extrusion value must be negative in order to push the extrusion towards the center of the truss.
Although the truss ends line up with the reference planes controlling the length of the trimmable ends,
they are not aligned and locked to those reference planes and would not pass a flex test.
67 Select the left edge of the left end extrusion, and lock the alignment.
70 Repeat the previous five steps for the right end of the truss. Make adjustments to account for the right side.
TIP When you finish the alignments, if you select the end extrusion, a lock displays on each side indicating the
constraints to the reference planes.
The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, fix any problematic alignments and constraints.
77 Proceed to the next lesson, “Testing the Family in a Project” on page 914.
NOTE Close any open families or projects. The truss family that you use in this lesson is identical to the truss you have created
in the previous exercises. Although you could continue using the previous family, it is recommended that you use the new
family in order to ensure consistency.
Datasets
3 In the Project Browser, expand Families, expand Structural Framing, and notice that the Wood Floor Truss_1
family has been loaded.
4 Proceed to the next exercise, “Testing a Family Instance in a Project” on page 915.
This project consists of foundation walls, a slab, a wood sill, and a wood rim joist. The rim joist was added
as a beam; therefore, the truss family you loaded will interact with it as one beam does to another.
TIP If the Structural tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Structural.
NOTE Do not be concerned with the exact location of the three beams. Try to make them approximately
equidistant as shown.
Notice the wood truss sits on top of the sill and attaches to the rim joist as expected.
NOTE Make sure you drag the grid line, not the wall or rim joist. You do not need to be precise; you are merely
testing the new floor truss to verify that it adapts to the changes.
■ The truss ends remained constant and adapted to the new beam length.
■ The center chase remained the same width while remaining centered.
In the next lesson, you nest the web components into the truss and create an array that adapts to changes
in length.
IMPORTANT Do not change the name of the family. The project and family need to interact based on a
consistent file name.
16 Proceed to the next lesson, “Working with Nested Subcomponents” on page 919.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m_Wood_Web.rfa file located in the Metric\Families folder.
IMPORTANT Make sure you snap the center line of the web components to the center reference line of the
truss.
Notice the model lines that surround the web component; they are visible only when you place the cursor
over the component. In the following steps, you align the web panel using these lines rather than the
extrusion edges.
Also notice that the depth of the web members needs to be changed. This will be accomplished in the next
exercise when you link the nested parameter with the host parameter.
13 For the align-to point, select the reference plane that is coincident with the left edge of the left center chase
extrusion.
15 Repeat the previous two steps to align the left edge of the right web component to the right edge of the
center chase as shown.
Each of these web components represents the starting point of the web arrays that you add later in this
lesson.
NOTE You do not have to align the top or bottom the web components because the height of the web members
will adapt to the truss height after you create and link the parameters in the next exercise. In addition, it is
important to note that you should avoid adding unnecessary constraints.
20 Select the center of the left web component as the align-to point.
21 Select the reference plane that you added to the left of the web components center as shown.
22 Click the lock to lock the reference plane to the centerline of the web component.
23 Repeat the previous two steps to align and lock the right web component and the reference plane as shown.
■ Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the left web component.
■ Select the reference plane that is coincident with the right edge of the left web component and the
outside edge of the center chase.
■ Place the dimension as shown.
■ Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the right web component.
■ Select the reference plane that is coincident with the left edge of the right web component and the
outside edge of the center chase.
■ Place the dimension as shown.
In the next exercise, you label these dimensions. You also add a formula to the parameter in order to
maintain the web position as the truss changes depth, length, or the width of the center chase.
4 In the Family Types dialog box, under Constraints, enter Depth - (Chord Thickness * 2) for the WebDepth
Formula.
TIP You can expand the width of the Family Types dialog box to facilitate typing within the formula field.
This formula ensures that the web depth will account for any changes in the chord thickness or truss depth.
NOTE Formulas are case sensitive. When you refer to another parameter within a formula, ensure you enter it
exactly as it is named.
5 Click OK.
9 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog box, select WebDepth, and click OK.
In the Type Properties dialog box, notice that “= “displays within the WebHeight button.
Notice the web members are resized to fit more precisely between the chords. In addition, notice the center
of each nested web component is locked to the reference plane that bisects it.
16 Under Other, enter Center Chase Width + (2*Chord Thickness) for CC Formula.
After you enter the formula, the resulting value is displayed as an inactive field.
24 Select the dimension that refers to the midpoint of the left web as shown.
27 Select the dimension that refers to the midpoint of the right web.
28 On the Options Bar, select Webhalflength for Label.
29 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
Because you have added and constrained new components, it is very important that you flex the model
to ensure the nested components and the formulas that controls them work as expected. It is especially
important to flex the model before arraying the truss so that you don’t multiply any existing problems.
41 Adjust the view so you can flex the truss while in the Family Types dialog box.
42 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.
43 In the Family Types dialog box, specify the following:
The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, fix any problematic alignments and constraints.
5 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point. When picking the
corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family.
12 Select the bottom-left corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point. When picking the corner,
use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family.
13 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move end point. When picking the
corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family.
Because there are two overlapping lines at this location, you are aligning the two bordering web components
to each other.
20 Click the lock symbol to keep the web components locked at their edges.
21 Within the left array, align and lock the two right web components.
22 Within the right array, align and lock the two boundaries between the three web components. Use the
same techniques as you did in the previous three steps.
NOTE This step is very important. If you do not lock the edges of the array, the web components overlap each
other when you change the depth of the truss.
Notice the arrays appear to be too long. This is because earlier in the tutorial, you added a dimension to
lock the Member Left and Member Right reference plane to the outer Left and Right reference planes. The
primary reason for this was to allow for flexing the length.
Notice the end of the array still overlaps the trimmable end. You will fix this in later steps by changing
the parameter value.
45 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1, and prepare the view for flexing.
46 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.
47 In the Family Types dialog box, specify the following:
The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, fix any problematic alignments and constraints.
You have completed the design of the primary components of the truss.
9 Proceed to the next lesson, “Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters” on page 935.
4 On the Structural Framing category line, click in the material field until the button displays as shown.
When you apply a material to the Structural Framing category, all subcomponents of that category are
assigned that material. If there was a metal beam in this building model, it would also have the wood
material applied to it. If you create subcategories as you design in the Family Editor, you have more control
over component visibility within a project.
15 Click in the Material field for the Wood Floor Truss subcategory, and click the button to open the Materials
dialog box.
16 In the Materials dialog box, click Duplicate.
17 In the New Material dialog box, enter Wood Floor Truss, and click OK.
28 Place the cursor over one of the arrayed web components, press TAB to toggle to the web component and
click to select it.
29 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family.
30 Click Yes to open the family for editing.
The web component family opens in a 3D view.
52 Click OK.
53 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics.
54 In the Visibility Graphics dialog box, under Visibility, expand Structural Framing, clear Wood Floor Truss
- Webs, and click OK.
Notice the web extrusions not longer display; however, the stick symbols continue to display.
7 In the Family Types dialog box, notice the default material is By Category.
8 Click OK.
Datasets
26 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level, and click Medium.
Notice the floor truss solid geometry is displayed.
NOTE When creating new components, create types for those most frequently used in your projects.
11 Click OK.
5 In the Family Types dialog box, under Dimensions, enter the follow formula for Depth:
if(Length < 6600, 286, if(Length < 7500, 350, if(Length < 9000, 400, 400)))
6 Click Apply.
7 In the Family Types dialog box, enter 8000 for length, and click Apply.
Notice the truss depth increases.
8 In the Family Types dialog box, enter 6000 for length, click Apply, and click OK.
NOTE You would have to change the depth of the sill and rim joist to accommodate this change.
IMPORTANT When you changed the width of the building footprint, you probably noticed a change in the
amount of time the view needed to regenerate. Regeneration time and overall performance can be affected by
over-designed families.
949
950 | Chapter 19 Using Advanced Features
Roofs
19
In this tutorial, you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit MEP 2008.
In addition, you learn how to add fascia, gutters, and soffits to the roofs that you
create.
951
Creating Roofs
In this lesson, you learn to create several different types of roofs, including hip, gable, shed, and mansard roofs. In this
lesson, you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion.
You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. Before you can
sketch the roof profile, you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. You do not need to create the work
plane; a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise.
Dataset
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.
2 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar, click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion.
3 In the Work Plane dialog, select Name, and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway.
4 Click OK.
5 In the Go To View dialog, verify that Section: Section1 is selected, and then click Open View to select a
section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof.
6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog, verify Level 3 is selected for Level, and click OK.
Before you can sketch the profile of the roof, you need to define four reference planes to help determine
key points on the profile sketch.
TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially, you can place it in the general
location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from
the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. To change where the temporary dimension is measured
from (face, centerline, and so on), click the blue square on the witness line.
9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face.
10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls.
15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch to complete the roof.
Next, use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior
walls.
Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of
the house that joins the breezeway.
21 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Sections (Type 1), and double-click Section 1.
22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.
23 Select one of the breezeway walls, press CTRL, and select the second wall.
24 On the Options Bar, click Attach for Top/Base, and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected.
25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof.
26 On the View toolbar, click to view the completed breezeway roof in the model.
27 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint” on page 956.
You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. You use roof slope lines to
define the roof gable ends.
1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.
2 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Pick Walls.
3 On the Options Bar, verify that Defines slope is selected, and enter 600 for Overhang.
4 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. Verify that a dashed green line
displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall.
5 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. Verify that a dashed green line
displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall.
Next, edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch.
9 Press CTRL, select both slope definition lines, and on the Options Bar, click .
The Element Properties dialog is displayed. By default, the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm
run.
13 On the View toolbar, click to view the gable roof and attached walls in the model.
14 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint” on page 958.
You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. After you define the roof
slope lines and complete the footprint, you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. When you
complete the roof, the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Roofs.rvt.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 3.
2 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar, click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.
3 On the Options Bar, clear Defines slope, and enter 600 for Overhang.
10 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan.
Next, add new slope lines to the roof.
18 On the View toolbar, click to view the new roof in the model.
19 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint” on page 960.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Roofs.rvt.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2.
2 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar, click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.
3 On the Options Bar, select Defines slope, and enter 600 for Overhang.
4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Pick Walls.
5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. Verify that a dashed
green line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls.
Next, close the roof sketch. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. The
sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other.
Next, trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. You must trim these
lines to create a valid sketch.
12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections.
14 Under Constraints, enter 600 for Base Offset From Level, and click OK.
15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Roof.
21 Click to use the Dynamic View tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof.
22 Using the same method that you used previously, join the two remaining walls to the roof. Press and hold
CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time.
Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. Next, use the Join Roof
command to fix the roof.
25 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint” on page 963.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2.
2 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar, click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.
3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Pick Walls.
4 On the Options Bar, clear Defines Slope, and enter 300 for Overhang.
5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way, press TAB, and then click to select
all three of the entry way walls.
Verify that a green dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the
walls.
Next, trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. You must trim these
lines to create a valid sketch.
12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the
roof.
13 On the Options Bar, select Defines slope.
Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker.
14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope, and press ENTER.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click 3D.
2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house.
3 On the Options Bar, click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch.
4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2.
5 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region, and zoom in around the shed roof footprint.
Before you can add slope arrows, you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. To help
locate the position of each split, you need to add two reference planes.
Next, change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope.
11 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the middle segment of the slope defining line.
12 On the Options Bar, clear Defines Slope.
Next, add two new slope arrows.
■ Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of
the slope arrow tail.
■ Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays, and then select it to specify the location
of the slope arrow head.
NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof, use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Garage Roof.
2 Select the gable roof over the garage.
3 On the Options Bar, click Edit.
4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition).
5 On the Options Bar, select Defines Slope.
9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. When aligning eaves, you must select one eave to use
to align both eaves.
Next, select a method to align the eaves.
10 On the Options Bar, select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the
eave height of the first eave.
11 Select both the horizontal eave lines.
Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave.
14 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique
name.
15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.
16 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a Mansard Roof” on page 967.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations, and double-click North.
Notice the model has four defined levels:
In the next steps, you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3.
7 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 3.
8 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar, click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.
9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Lines.
17 On the View toolbar, click to display the model with the complete mansard roof.
18 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique
name.
19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.
Dataset
4 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar, click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia.
12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building.
Creating Gutters
In this exercise, you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium
building model.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, c_Condominium.rvt.
1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter.
7 Under Materials and Finishes, click in the Value field for Material, and then click .
8 In the Materials dialog, select Metal-Aluminum for Name, and click OK three times.
9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof.
Creating Soffits
In this exercise, you learn how to place a roof soffit. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium
building model that you used in the previous exercise.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, c_Condominium.rvt.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Roof.
2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit.
3 On the Design Bar, click Pick Roofs.
4 Select the roof.
9 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique
name.
10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.
975
976 | Chapter 20 Customizing Project Settings and Templates
Modifying Project and
System Settings 20
In this tutorial, you learn how to modify your Revit MEP 2008 working
environment. In the first lesson, you modify the system environment, which is
independent of the project settings. In the second lesson, you modify project
that project. Finally, you create an office template, and set it as your default
template.
977
Modifying System Settings
In this lesson, you learn how to control the system settings within Revit MEP. System settings are local to each computer
and applied to all projects; they are not saved to project or template files.
NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error display using
this color.
15 Click OK.
16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall.
17 Sketch a simple straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area.
18 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the wall.
■ Under Notifications, select your preferred Save Reminder interval, and select Normal for Tooltip
Assistance.
■ Under Username, enter the name you want to use during worksharing. Your login name displays by
default.
■ Under Journal File Cleanup, select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals
older than (days).
Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. Journal files
are text documents that record each step during your Revit MEP sessions. These files are used primarily
in the software support process. Journals can be run in order to detect a problem or recreate lost steps
or files. They are saved at the termination of each Revit MEP session.
29 Click OK.
Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you
place the cursor over any building component.
TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. On the File menu, choose New ➤ Project,
and click Browse to select a template.
4 Click Cancel.
5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse.
6 In the Browse for Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click OK.
7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse.
This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates that you use
to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. However, there are
some circumstances where you may need to modify the path, such as in a large, centralized, architectural
firm where customized templates reside on a network drive.
8 Click Cancel.
9 In the Options dialog, under Libraries, notice the list of library names.
The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path points Revit
MEP to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library names and path, and you
can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load,
and Import dialogs.
When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit MEP file, you can click on the library folder located in
the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries display as icons in the left
pane of the dialog.
13 Navigate to C:\My Documents or any other folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP
projects, templates, or families, and click OK.
TIP You may want to create a new folder first, and select it as the library path.
The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs. The library
icons display in the order that they are listed in the Options dialog.
15 Click until My Library is at the top of the list, and click OK.
16 On the File menu, click Open.
17 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the My Library icon.
Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. If you work in a large office, you may want to
set up an office library on a network path in order to increase productivity and maintain office standards.
18 Click Cancel.
19 On the Settings menu, click Options.
20 Click the File Locations tab.
21 Under Libraries, select My Library.
25 Click OK.
26 Proceed to the next exercise, “Specifying Spelling Options” on page 982.
12 On the Standard toolbar, click to open a new Revit MEP project using the default template.
13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Text.
14 Click in the drawing area, and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU.
15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.
16 On the Tools menu, click Spelling.
Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. It allowed
SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase.
17 Click OK.
18 On the Settings menu, click Options.
19 In the Options dialog, click the Spelling tab.
20 Under Settings, click Restore Defaults.
This resets the spelling settings to their original configuration.
6 Under Dimension Snaps, click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000;
and enter 500 ;.
7 Under Object Snaps, notice the two-letter acronyms next to each object snap option.
These are shortcut keys that you can use at any time when working on the design. For example, if you
want to snap an object to a wall midpoint, enter SM and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you
commit an action. After you click to place the object at the midpoint, snapping reverts to the system default
settings.
TIP To zoom while in the act of sketching, use the wheel button on your mouse. If you do not have a wheel
button, you can right-click and select a zoom option from the context menu. While sketching, you can also use
the zoom shortcut keys such as ZO to zoom out.
11 While sketching a generic straight wall, zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to
500 mm.
This is the increment that you added previously.
12 While sketching the wall, enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off.
Notice that when snapping is turned off completely, the listening dimension reflects the exact length of
the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right.
Notice that snapping is once again active. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping, the command
is only active for one click of the mouse.
17 Enter SM.
18 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall.
23 Click OK.
24 On the File menu, click Close, and do not save the file.
25 Proceed to the next lesson, “Modifying Project Settings” on page 985.
This building model has a generic roof and generic floor. After you create a new fieldstone material and apply it to the
exterior wall face, you render a region to observe the changes.
3 Click Duplicate.
This creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point.
4 In the New Material dialog, enter Masonry - Fieldstone, and click OK.
You have created a new material that can be applied to any model component in this project. Notice that
the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. In the steps that follow, you
modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view.
15 Click OK.
16 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click 02 Entry Level.
TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click Rendering.
After you draw the rectangle around the 3D model and select the scene, the rendering process begins.
When finished, the fieldstone material that you created is displayed.
TIP If you want to see the material in greater detail, click Display Model on the Rendering tab of the Design Bar.
Zoom into the model, select Region Raytrace, and drag a rectangle around the area you want to render.
Notice the roof did not render. This is because a material has not been applied to the roof. In the exercise,
“Controlling Object Styles” on page 991, you apply a material to default roofs and resolve this.
NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that
exercise, m_Settings-in progress.rvt.
5 Click New.
6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog, click Custom.
7 Under Custom, click Import.
8 Navigate to the training folders installed with your Revit MEP software.
TIP Typically, your training files can be found on C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\Revit MEP\Training. The location of these files can vary depending on the path you set during
installation.
12 Click OK.
TIP If the pattern does not display, adjust your zoom settings as needed.
NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that
exercise, m_Settings-in progress.rvt.
2 On the keyboard, use the shortcut keys ZR (Zoom in Region) and drag a rectangle around the three windows
facing you.
3 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style, and click Shading with Edges.
4 Select one of the rectangular windows.
select .
8 In the Materials dialog, click By Category (located under the Name list).
This means that the material is assigned by the Object Styles setting.
select .
15 In the Materials dialog, click By Category.
16 In the Type Properties dialog, click OK.
17 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK.
18 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
Notice the exterior frames of all the windows are now gray.
24 On the right side of the dialog, under AccuRender, for Texture, click .
25 In the Material Library dialog, expand Solid Colors, and select Reds and Oranges.
26 Under Name, select Indian,Dark,Glossy, and click OK.
27 Under Surface Pattern, click the Color value, select a red color, and click OK.
28 In the Materials dialog, click OK.
29 In the Object Styles dialog, click OK.
Notice that the red paint trim material is applied to all windows regardless of their type.
6 Click OK twice.
You have created a new line pattern; now you must apply it. There are two ways to apply the line style to
the roof. You can use the Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the roof appearance in a specific view, or
you can use Object Styles to apply the change to all views.
7 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style, and click Hidden Line.
8 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles.
9 In the Object Styles dialog, under Category, select Roofs.
10 Select Red for Line Color, and select Roof Line for Line Pattern.
NOTE The line pattern is most appropriate in plan views. The pattern is not applied in a perspective or camera
view where you expect to see a solid line. Plans, sections, elevations, and orthogonal 3D views show line color
and pattern.
23 Click OK twice.
29 Click OK.
30 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Lines.
31 In the Type Selector, select Zoning Setback.
32 On the Options Bar, specify the following:
■ Click .
■ Click .
NOTE If you only want the setback to display on the site view, use the Detail Lines command on the Drafting
tab of the Design Bar. Detail lines only show in the view where they are created, as if they are placed on an
overlay of the view.
37 Click OK.
NOTE If Site is not selected, select it and then clear Property Lines.
42 Click OK.
Modifying Annotations
In this exercise, you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. You
also load a new window annotation symbol and apply it to show the window instance number rather than the window
type.
NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that
exercise, m_Settings-in progress.rvt.
7 Click OK twice.
You have created a new dimension style.
16 Click Cancel.
17 On the Settings menu, click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags.
18 In the Tags dialog, under Category, scroll down to Windows.
Notice that there is a window tag loaded and applied to windows.
19 Click Load.
20 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window
Tag - Number.rfa.
In the preview image, notice that the label displays 1i. This indicates this tag is designed to display the
window instance value rather than the type value.
21 Click Open.
22 In the Tags dialog, scroll to Windows and notice that M_Window Tag - Number is now the assigned tag.
This tag is used when tagging windows By Category.
23 Under Loaded Tags, click M_Window Tag - Number, and select the drop-down arrow that displays.
Notice that you can choose between the two window tag types loaded into this project. Leave M_Window
Tag - Number as the assigned tag.
24 Click OK.
25 Press and hold CTRL, select the 3 window tags, and press Delete.
30 Select the Window Tag category with the loaded tag, M_Window Tag - Number.
31 Under Leader, verify that Create is clear, and click OK.
The remaining untagged windows are tagged by instance value. Both window tag types can coexist within
the same view.
TIP Using the techniques learned in the previous steps, you can have multiple views: one displaying window
type tags and the other displaying window instance values.
NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that
exercise, m_Settings-in progress.rvt.
6 Click OK.
Unless overridden, dimensions use these project settings.
NOTE In this project, temporary dimensions now snap to the wall faces and to the door and window openings.
The location of temporary witness lines can be changed by clicking the control.
TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties
dialog or the Detail Level icon on the View Control Bar.
In this table, you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another.
You do not select a view scale to move it. The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the
column based on the direction.
12 Click OK.
13 On the File menu, click Save.
14 On the File menu, click Close.
15 Proceed to the next exercise, “Modifying Project Browser Organization” on page 1000.
3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order, and notice the progression of each view:
6 In the Project Browser, expand both the Architectural and Structural views.
7 On the Settings menu, click Browser Organization.
8 Select Phase, and click Apply.
In the Project Browser, notice that Views are grouped based on Phase.
19 Click OK.
20 In the Browser Organization dialog, select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization, and
click OK.
21 In the Project Browser, under Views, expand Complete, expand 3D Views, and expand both Architectural
and Structural.
Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase, View
Type (Family and Type), and Discipline.
In this lesson, you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. All the settings
that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. You can also save these settings in a template file. By saving
these settings as a template and using it throughout the office, you maintain consistent standards and reduce the
amount of repetitive work. In the lesson that follows, you create an office template.
9 In the Project Browser, navigate throughout the various views and schedules.
Notice that the construction template is more complex than the default template. Other templates, such
as the structural template, are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules, but the view properties
have been modified to maximize the use of the structural tools.
14 Click Open.
15 Under Create New, select Project Template, and click OK.
16 Proceed to the next exercise, “Modifying Project Settings” on page 1004.
■ Materials
■ Fill patterns
■ Object styles
■ Line styles, weights, and patterns
■ Annotations
■ Project units
■ Temporary dimensions
■ Detail levels
■ Project Browser organization
In addition to the list above, there are additional commands under the Settings menu that allow modifications that
can be saved in a template. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise.
During this exercise, specific modifications are not dictated. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt
the template to your needs. For more details on modifying these settings, see the previous lesson, “Modifying System
Settings” on page 978 or refer to the Help documentation.
RELATED See “Modifying System Settings” on page 978 for more information on creating new AccuRender
materials.
When you save a new AccuRender material designed to be used in an office template, be aware that access
to the original material library may be necessary at some point. You may want to save the material to a
library located on a network path.
TIP Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. Model patterns represent actual element appearance
on a building. You can align, rotate, and move model patterns. You can also dimension to model pattern lines.
RELATED See “Modifying Project Settings” on page 985 for more information on creating new fill patterns.
TIP When the material of a component is set to by category, it adopts the material assigned to its object styles
category.
10 Click the Model Objects tab, and scroll through the list of categories.
11 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed.
12 If necessary, create new subcategories.
13 Click the Annotation Objects tab.
14 Modify categories, and create new subcategories as needed.
15 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog.
Modify arrowheads
35 Select the Type drop-down list, and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles.
To see the details of a particular style, select it from this list.
41 Select the Type drop-down list, and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles.
To see the details of a particular style, select it from this list.
TIP In the drawing area, you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines.
60 Under Doors and Windows, specify the default location for temporary dimensions.
61 Click OK.
NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog. To move the view scales, click the arrows between columns.
The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa.
64 Click OK.
73 On the Settings menu, there are several additional commands that control the project environment.
Although these settings can be saved within a template, you should consider each carefully before applying
changes to a template.
For example, you can save rendered scene settings to a template. However, you may only want to add
generically named settings that would be applicable to most projects. In such a case, you must decide if
the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work.
Each of these areas are covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. Use the table below as a checklist,
and make modifications in each area as necessary. Links to associated tutorials are provided. You can find
additional information in Help. Each command is available on the Settings menu.
Project Parameters This command is covered in an exercise If necessary, you can add project (and shared)
later in this lesson. See “Setting up Shared parameters to a template. This could be useful for
and Project Parameters” on page 1016. things such as hardware, furniture, or electrical fixtures.
Phases Project Phasing If necessary, you can set up the phases, phase filters,
and graphic overrides applicable to most projects.
Room and Area Area Analysis If necessary, you can create and modify area schemes
Settings if there are default settings applicable to most projects.
View Templates This command is covered in an exercise Create and modify the view templates to control the
later in this lesson. See “Modifying Views appearance of default views.
and View Templates” on page 1011.
Render Scene This command is covered in an exercise If necessary, you can create scene settings and save
later in this lesson. See “Modifying Render them to the template.
Scene Settings” on page 1013
Site Settings Modifying Contour Visibility and Site If necessary, you can set the default contour line
Settings interval, the section cut material, and the poche depth.
74 Proceed to the next exercise, “Loading and Modifying Families and Groups” on page 1008.
3 To modify, create, or load a new door type, click on the Options Bar.
Use the instructions in the table below to load, create, or modify a door.
Goal: Steps:
Load new door type In the Element Properties dialog, select Load. Navigate to the directory containing the
door type. Select it, and click Open.
Modify door type In the Element Properties dialog, select Edit/New. Make modifications, and click OK.
Create new door type In the Element Properties dialog, select Edit/New. Click Duplicate. Enter Name, and
click OK. Modify type properties, and click OK.
4 Click OK.
5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify.
You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this
tab. You can also load families and groups from the File menu.
12 Click OK.
13 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps, load, create, or modify any component families or
groups as necessary.
14 Proceed to the next exercise, “Modifying Views and View Templates” on page 1011.
3 Specify each value according to your needs. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for
this view type.
4 If necessary, rename or duplicate the view template and make modifications.
5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the Name drop-down list.
6 Click OK.
7 In the Project Browser, expand Views, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.
8 On the View menu, click Apply View Template.
Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. Upon the application of the view template, the
view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. After applying the
template, the view is not linked to the template in any way. Subsequent modifications to the view template
do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. There is no limit to the number of
times you can apply a view template to a view. In addition, there is no limit to the number of view templates
that you can apply.
NOTE Do not select Apply automatically to new views of same type. This would result in the Site Plan view
template becoming the default template for all new plan views.
18 If you modified any other view templates, open the view from the Project Browser, and apply the appropriate
template.
20 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, review the existing floor plans.
21 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Level 1, and, in the context menu, notice that you
have the option to rename, duplicate, or delete this view.
If necessary, you can rename this view according to your preference. You can also duplicate or delete the
view.
22 In the Project Browser, review the floor plans, ceiling plans, and elevations. Rename, duplicate, or delete
them as needed.
23 To add additional levels to the template, click Level from the Basics tab of the Design Bar.
Make sure you are still in the South Elevation view.
Create 3D views
34 Click the arrow on the right side of the Dynamic View dialog.
35 You can use Orient to a Direction or Orient to a View to set the camera location and target.
38 If you want to add schedules to your template, select the category type, and click OK.
39 In the Schedule Properties dialog, make the following modifications as needed:
40 Click OK.
41 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template.
TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the titleblock. To do so, select the default titleblock, and
click OK. After the sheet is created, select the titleblock and delete it. You can still add views to the sheet. To
later add a titleblock to a sheet, go to the View menu, and click New ➤ Place Titleblock.
43 Add views to the sheet by selecting Add View from the View tab of the Design Bar.
TIP You can drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet.
44 To rename or renumber the sheet, right-click the sheet in the Project Browser, and click Rename.
45 Create new sheets as needed.
Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet.
46 Proceed to the next exercise, “Modifying Render Scene Settings” on page 1013.
■ Automatic Sky: Treats the background as a sky, and changes the color automatically depending on the
sun and sky conditions.
■ Solid Color: Specifies a single color that appears behind your rendering.
■ 2 Color Gradient: Lets you vary the color between two selected colors.
■ 3 Color Gradient: Lets you vary the color between three selected colors.
TIP As you select options, the relevant tab appears; for example, select the Clouds option, and a Clouds tab
appears.
■ Background Image: Lets you map images to your background. Choose from bitmap, tiff, jpeg, or targa.
Background images are available from the AccuRender software, which is included on the Revit MEP
CD. Be sure that you have installed this software; if not, you can install AccuRender by running the
install program on the Revit MEP CD.
■ Clouds: Adds procedurally generated clouds to the background.
■ Haze: Simulates effects from slight “depth cues” to dense fog.
■ Ground Plane: Adds an infinite plane to your rendering.
■ Alpha Channel: Lets you use the image's alpha channel (embedded pixel-by-pixel masking information),
if one exists.
7 Click OK.
8 Under Scene Settings, clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view.
9 Click Sun.
10 On the Solar Angles tab, verify On is selected and select By Date, Time, and Place for Specify Solar Angles.
11 Specify the date and time, place, settings, and colors, and then click OK.
12 Under Plant Season, choose the appropriate season for plant rendering.
Different seasons directly affect any AccuRender plants in the view; for example, a deciduous tree in summer
appears in full bloom with leaves, while in winter, it is completely bare.
■ Select Back Face Culling to eliminate rendering on model faces that do not face the camera eye. This
works on opaque faces only. AccuRender always processes transparent faces. Back face culling decreases
rendering time and space; however, the quality also is lower.
■ Select View Culling to eliminate rendering model faces that lie outside the area being raytraced. This
setting is effective for region raytraces.
■ Select Quality: Click the Quality drop-down list to choose an option: Draft, Medium, Good, Better,
Best.
■ Specify the Solution Goal: This limits the radiosity calculation to a certain number of steps. This value
is used both for the initial number of steps when you first use the Radiate command and for any
subsequent calculation by clicking Continue from the Options Bar.
■ Specify the Color Bleeding value: This controls the color saturation of reflected light. Higher values
cause the color of reflected light to more closely approximate the color of the reflecting surface.
Meaningful values are between 0 and 1.
■ Select Quality: Click the Quality drop-down list to choose an antialiasing option: Draft, Medium, Good,
Better, Best.
Antialiasing is a process in which more than one ray is shot for each pixel in an attempt to better
resolve the value of the pixel. Increasing the antialiasing level adds considerable rendering time. Draft
provides the lowest quality and fastest speed. Best is the slowest, but provides the highest quality.
■ Select Soft Shadows to produce more realistic shadow edges. Shadows based on the size of the light
source are calculated.
■ Select Blurry Reflections to affect the look of reflections in glass.
■ Select Blurry Transparency to affect the look of material seen behind glass.
■ Select Recalc Radiosity Lights to recalculate the shadows cast during the radiosity preprocess. This is
a very time consuming operation but, when used in conjunction with high antialiasing and soft
shadows it can produce very high quality renderings with fewer radiosity artifacts.
3 If you modified the settings in this dialog, select Save As, name the file, and click Save.
6 If you modified the settings in this dialog, select Save As, name the file, and click Save.
7 On the File menu, click Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF.
You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit MEP line weight. You can
save these mappings to a text file, and they become the set mappings for the project. These settings are
retained within the project template; therefore, you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved.
8 In the dialog, match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight, for example, Pen
Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1, Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2, and so on. Set as many
pen-line weight mappings as desired.
9 Select Save As, name the file, and click Save.
When you import a DWG or DXF file, each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen
number/line weight settings you created.
10 Proceed to the next exercise, “Setting up Shared and Project Parameters” on page 1016.
NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. If a file already exists, you can browse to that
file and modify it as needed.
2 Click Create.
This allows you to name the external parameter file. If this template will be used by multiple people within
an office, you may want to save the file to a network location.
7 Under Parameter group, select a group that you want to add parameters to.
8 Under Parameters, click New.
9 Name the Parameter, and specify the Discipline and Type of Parameter.
10 Click OK.
11 For each parameter group, add required parameters.
12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters.
2 Under Name, select the first printer for which you want to create named settings.
3 Under Settings, click Setup.
4 Click Save As.
5 In the New dialog, enter a name for the print setting and click OK.
6 Modify the printer settings.
7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer, modify the printer settings, click Save as, enter a new
name for the printer, and click OK. Create additional settings as needed.
8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer.
9 In the Print dialog, select a different printer, click Setup, and create new settings for this printer.
10 Repeat these steps as needed.
TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF and PDF writer.
16 To use the template, go to the File menu, and click New ➤ Project.
17 Select Browse, and navigate to the location where you saved the template.
18 Select the template, and click Open.
19 Click OK.
The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project.
You can also set this template as your default template.
TIP There are other ways you can create a template. If you have a project, you could delete the model geometry
and save the empty project as a template file. This can provide a good starting point for a template. In addition,
you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another.
In this lesson, you modified settings, loaded components, and saved them to a template. By investing the time to
individualize your template, you ensure that office standards are maintained. In addition, you significantly reduce the
amount of repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project.